JP2016041256A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of easily detecting a fraudulent act.SOLUTION: When both of an inner frame 12 and a front frame 14 are closed, a Pachinko machine 10 uses respective illumination parts 29-33 and a display lamp 34 to perform notification by light emission for 30 seconds, namely a predetermined period after the closing. Thus, even if at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is closed, for example, a fraudulent act is performed, and then the opened inner frame 12 or the opened front frame 14 is closed in a short time, the Pachinko machine 10 can report that the closed inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been previously opened by the light emission for 30 seconds after the closing. Therefore, a fraudulent act performed to the Pachinko machine 10 can be easily detected.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is generally configured to be provided with a door body that can be opened and closed on the front side of a gaming machine body, and the front surface of the gaming machine body can be opened (for example, Patent Document 1 ). Here, it is also possible that the door body is composed of an inner frame attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be opened and closed, and a glass door (front frame) attached to the inner frame so as to be opened and closed. It is common.

  In a pachinko machine that is a type of gaming machine, a game board is mounted from the back side of the inner frame, and the game area of the game board can be exposed by opening the glass door. Therefore, if a malfunction occurs in the game area during the game (for example, a malfunction of an accessory placed in the game area or a ball clogging of a game ball flowing down in the game area), the hall attendant makes a glass The door is opened to solve the problem.

  On the other hand, a control device for controlling the game is attached to the back side of the game board. When the inner frame is closed with respect to the gaming machine main body, the control device is connected to the gaming machine main body and the inner frame. And the like (for example, the back side of the inner frame). If a malfunction occurs in the operation of the gaming machine during the game (for example, a prize ball is not paid out or a game ball is not fired), an inner frame is opened by a hall attendant, and a control device check (for example, Wiring and electrical contact checks) are performed.

  By the way, in a pachinko machine which is a kind of gaming machine, lottery is performed at a predetermined timing, and when a predetermined result (for example, a big hit) is obtained by the lottery, a large amount of game media (game balls and coins) are paid out. It becomes possible. Since the lottery is controlled by a control device (for example, a main control device), the control device is illegally altered by an unauthorized person for the purpose of generating an unreasonable jackpot and illegally paying out a large amount of game media. There are many cases that occur. In addition, as a specific example of unauthorized modification, an unauthorized substrate (for example, “hanging substrate”) is attached to the control device, the control device itself is replaced with an unauthorized substrate, or the CPU of the control device is illegally used. For example, the CPU may be replaced. Therefore, the inner frame may be opened illegally for the purpose of fraudulent acts by the fraudster.

In addition, the fraudulent person may bend the ball guide nail installed in the game area illegally to make it advantageous for winning the game ball to the winning opening that triggers the lottery (so-called nail bending goto), An illegal act such as directly putting a game ball by hand into a highly profitable winning opening (for example, a specific winning opening) may be performed. Therefore, the glass door may also be opened illegally.
Since the inner frame and the glass door can often be opened improperly as described above, when the opening of the inner frame or the glass door is detected, the inner frame and the glass door are turned on by lamp lighting or sound output during the opening period. A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies the outside that a frame or a glass door has been opened and prevents unauthorized opening.

JP 2007-111100 A

  However, when the inner frame or the glass door is opened, in the gaming machine that notifies only during the opening period, when the fraudulent act by the fraudulent person is completed within a relatively short time, Since the notification time is also relatively short, there is a problem that it is difficult to detect fraud.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of facilitating the discovery of fraud.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a main body, a door body that opens and closes a front surface of the main body, and a door that detects opening when the door body is opened with respect to the main body. A first notification mode that includes an opening detection unit and a notification unit that performs notification when the door opening detection unit detects the opening of the door body, and shows a mode of notification performed by the notification unit. When the door opening detection is detected by the first notification mode setting means and the door opening detection means, the first notification mode setting means sets the first notification mode setting means during the door opening period. A first execution unit that causes the notification unit to perform notification in a notification mode, a second notification mode setting unit that sets a second notification mode indicating a mode of notification performed by the notification unit, and the release is detected. The door closing detection indicates the door opening. Second detection means for causing the notification means to execute notification in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting means during a predetermined period after the door is closed when detected by the step. I have.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the notification mode by the notification unit in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit, and the second notification mode setting. The notification mode by the notification unit in the second notification mode set by the unit has a different configuration.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the second execution means counts an elapsed time after the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body. Second time measuring means, execution prohibiting means for prohibiting notification to be executed by the notification means until an elapsed time measured by the second time measuring means has passed a predetermined period, and time counting by the second time measuring means And a prohibition canceling means for canceling the prohibition by the execution prohibiting means when a predetermined period has elapsed.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the notification means notifies by light emission when opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detection means. The second notification mode setting means includes a first time measuring means for measuring an elapsed time after the door opening detection is detected by the door opening detecting means, and the first time measuring means. Illuminance setting means for setting, as the second notification mode, a light emission mode in which the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification unit changes according to the elapsed time counted.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the first notification mode setting means sets a light emission mode in which light emission by the light emission notification unit flashes as the first notification mode. The illuminance setting unit includes a setting unit, and the illuminance setting unit changes the illuminance of the light emission by the light emission notification unit that changes according to the elapsed time measured by the first time measuring unit, and the illuminance setting unit changes the illuminance of the light emission that exceeds the predetermined illuminance Restricted illuminance setting means for setting a mode as the second notification mode is provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the door body is opened and the opening is detected by the door opening detection means, the first execution means sets the first notification mode setting means during the door opening period. The notification means executes the notification in the first notification mode set by the above. Then, when the opened door body is closed and the closure is detected by the door opening detection means, the second execution means is set by the second notification mode setting means during a predetermined period after the door body is closed. The notification means performs the notification in the second notification mode. Thus, even when the opened door is closed, the second execution unit causes the notification unit to perform notification during the predetermined period. Therefore, even if the door is opened, for example, an illegal act is performed on the gaming machine, and then the opened door is closed within a short time, the closed door is previously opened. It can be notified during a predetermined period that there has been. Therefore, for example, there is an effect that it is possible to easily find an illegal act performed on a gaming machine. The notification mode by the notification unit in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit and the notification mode by the notification unit in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit The same configuration or different configurations may be used.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the notification mode by the notification unit in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit and the notification mode by the notification unit in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit Since the configuration is different, the notification is performed by the notification unit when the door opening detection unit detects the opening of the door body, and the notification unit is performed when the door opening detection unit detects the closing of the door body. The notification is a different notification mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly distinguish and notify whether the door body is in the open state or whether the closed door body has been in the open state before.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the elapsed time counted by the second timing means, that is, the door opening is closed by the door opening detecting means. The execution prohibiting unit prohibits the notification to be executed by the notification unit until the elapsed time from the detection of the period of time passes a predetermined period. Thereafter, when the elapsed time since the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body passes a predetermined period, the prohibition release means releases the prohibition by the execution prohibition means. Thus, even if the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body, the notification is prohibited until the elapsed time since the detection has passed a predetermined period. Therefore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in a gaming machine and the door body is normally opened to remove the malfunction, and then the opened door body is closed, the door body Since the prohibition of notification is temporarily performed during a predetermined period after the closing of the door, the person who closed the opened door body (for example, a store clerk) recognizes that the door body has been securely closed. There is an effect that can be done.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the illuminance setting means emits light according to the elapsed time counted by the first timing means. The mode of light emission in which the illuminance of light emission by the means changes is set as the second notification mode. Therefore, when the opened door body is closed and the closure is detected by the door opening detection means, the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification means is changed according to the elapsed time during a predetermined period, so that the light emission mode Can be changed smoothly. In this way, since the illuminance of the light emission changes smoothly according to the elapsed time, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to notice the change in the light emission mode, and the change in the light emission mode is caused by the closed door body. It can be made hard to grasp that it is information which shows that it was an open state before. On the other hand, for example, a game shop clerk who knows in advance that the change in the light emission mode is a notification indicating that the closed door body was previously open, There is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp that the closed door body was previously opened.
According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, the blink setting unit sets the light emission mode in which the light emission by the light emission notification unit blinks as the first notification mode. Thus, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the light emission by the light emission notification means is repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the limited illuminance setting means emits light from the light emission notifying means according to the elapsed time measured by the first time measuring means, that is, according to the elapsed time after the door opening detection is detected by the door opening detecting means. The light emission mode in which the illuminance changes at a level exceeding the predetermined illuminance is set as the second notification mode. Thereby, when the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body, the light emission by the light emission notification means does not turn off during a predetermined period, and changes with an illuminance exceeding a predetermined illuminance. Thus, the light emitted by the light emission notification means is repeatedly turned on and off when the door opening detection means detects the door opening, while the door opening detection means detects the door closing. In this case, the light intensity does not turn off and changes with illuminance exceeding a predetermined illuminance. Therefore, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the light emission notification means performs the light emission notification means, and when the door opening detection means detects the door body closure, the light emission notification means performs the light emission. The notification by means of a light emission mode that is clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly distinguish and notify whether the door body is in the open state or whether the closed door body has been in the open state before.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state where an inner frame, a front frame, and a lower plate unit were opened. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the inner frame switch which detects opening and closing of an inner frame. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the circuit structure inside a lamp display apparatus. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed in the change process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the frame opening / closing monitoring process performed in the main process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the frame command transmission process performed in the frame opening / closing monitoring process of FIG. It is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed in the main process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the external interruption process performed with MPU provided in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the frame state corresponding | compatible process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the frame open | release performed in the frame state corresponding | compatible process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the frame open | release alerting process performed in the process at the time of the frame open of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the frame closure performed in the frame state corresponding | compatible process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the frame closing alerting | reporting process performed in the process at the time of the frame closing of FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the mode of alerting | reporting by light emission performed by each electrical decoration part and a display lamp when either one of an inner frame or a front frame is open | released and the process at the time of frame open | release is performed. Yes, (b) is a notification of light emission performed by each of the lighting units and the display lamps when both the inner frame and the front frame are closed and the frame closing process is executed for a predetermined period from the closing. It is the schematic diagram which showed the aspect. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the frame open | release notification execution process performed in the main process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the external interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the frame closing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame closure alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower plate unit 15 are opened, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing a structure of an inner frame switch SW1 that detects opening / closing of 12, a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 are omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In the game hall, the outer peripheral surface of the outer frame 11 is fixed to an installation location called an island of the game hall. Since the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower dish unit 15 are configured to be openable to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower dish unit 15 are not touched from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Inspection and adjustment are performed with the inner frame 12 and the like open to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11.

  In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of an ABS resin inner frame base 25 (see FIG. 2) formed in a rectangular shape, and a substantially circular central window 25a (see FIG. 2) is formed at the center of the inner frame base 25. 2) is formed. A game board 13 (see FIG. 4) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112 a that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112 a to the front area of the game board 13. ) Etc. are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, an inner frame switch SW1 (SW1a, SW1b) for detecting the opening and closing of the inner frame 12 is provided between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. A front frame switch SW2 (SW2a, SW2b) for detecting opening and closing of the front frame 14 is provided between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. The inner frame switch SW1 includes a female switch SW1a disposed on a surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12, and an insulating member disposed on a surface of the inner frame 12 facing the outer frame 11. And a male switch SW1b. The front frame switch SW2 includes a female switch SW2a disposed on the surface of the inner frame 12 facing the front frame 14, and a male switch SW2b disposed on the surface of the front frame 14 facing the inner frame 12. It consists of.

  Here, the structure of the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 have the same structure, the structure of the inner frame switch SW1 will be described, and the description of the front frame switch SW2 will be omitted. FIG. 3A is a schematic diagram showing the state of the inner frame switch SW1 when the inner frame 12 is closed (off state, cutoff state). FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram showing the state (ON state, conduction state) of the inner frame switch SW1 when the inner frame 12 is opened.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, the female switch SW1a disposed on the surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12 incorporates a pair of terminal pairs SW1c made of metal as a conductive member. ing.

  Here, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the female switch SW1a disposed on the surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12 is arranged on the surface of the inner frame 12 facing the outer frame 11. The provided male switch SW1b is inserted. The male switch SW1b inserted in the female switch SW1a is inserted between the terminal pair SW1c to prevent contact between the terminal pairs SW1c. Thus, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the contact between the terminal pairs SW1c is hindered by the insulating male switch SW1b, so the inner frame switch SW1 is turned off (conduction is cut off). It becomes a state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the male switch SW <b> 1 b disposed on the surface of the inner frame 12 facing the outer frame 11 is connected to the outer frame 11. It is pulled out from the female switch SW1a disposed on the surface facing the inner frame 12. Since the terminal pair SW1c in the female switch SW1a has a structure in which an urging force is generated in a direction facing each other, the terminal pair SW1c is in contact with each other when the male switch SW1b is pulled out from the female switch SW1a. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the inner frame switch SW1 is turned on (conducted).

  Thus, the inner frame switch SW1 is turned off when the inner frame 12 is closed (becomes a shut-off state), and is turned on when the inner frame 12 is opened (becomes a conductive state). ). The structure of the inner frame switch SW1 is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 3, and the inner frame switch SW1 is turned off when the inner frame 12 is closed, and the inner frame switch is opened when the inner frame 12 is opened. Any structure may be used as long as the switch SW1 is turned on. The same applies to the structure of the front frame switch SW2.

  The inner frame switch SW1 only needs to be able to distinguish between a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened and a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed. That is, by using a control method different from the control method shown below (for example, the frame opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 14)), the inner frame 12 is turned on when the inner frame 12 is closed, and the inner frame 12 is opened. In this case, a switch having a structure that is turned off can be used as the inner frame switch SW1. Similarly, a switch having a structure that is turned on when the front frame 14 is closed and turned off when the front frame 14 is opened can be used as the front frame switch SW2.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. . A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or flashing of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpots or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 4) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed. Inside the operation handle 51, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6). And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window portion 14 c of the front frame 14. Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner circumference 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 surround the front and rear. A game area to be played is formed. The game area is a substantially circular area that is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (the upper left portion in FIG. 4) to prevent a situation in which the ball guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 once returns to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 4) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37b is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 4). The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being probabilistically changing, operating in a short time, or in the normal state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not in the lit state, and the stop symbol corresponding to the probable big hit Whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an out-of-game symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 being probable is a game state in which the jackpot probability is increased and it is easy to shift to the special game state. Further, during the probability change in the present embodiment, the game is in a state where the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 4). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is short-running, it is a game state in which it is easy for a ball to easily enter the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 4) with the jackpot probability remaining unchanged and only the second symbol hit probability increased. . In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased). It should be noted that, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 and the number of times the electric accessory is released per hit are changed. It is good as a thing.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance 64 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device 82 composed of a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) that variably displays the second symbol with the passage of the ball of the second entrance 67 as a trigger.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, and, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 includes a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Is arranged. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 until the stop symbol (any one of the probable jackpot symbol, the normal jackpot symbol, or the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of entered balls is held up to 4 times, and the number of held times is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the number of lights of the holding lamp 85. Four hold lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning at the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more. In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically held in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) by the frequency | count. In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not perform lighting display.

  The second symbol display device 82 includes a second symbol display unit 83 and a holding lamp 84, and each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the display unit 83 displays a display symbol (second symbol). The symbol “○” and “x” in FIG. 1 are alternately lit to display a variation, and the variation display is stopped when the variation display stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol “◯”). The entrance 64 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of passes through the second entrance 67 of the sphere is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit on the hold lamp 84. The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps on the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. You may make it carry out using a part of. Similarly, the hold lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, and is not limited to 4 times, or 3 times or less (for example, (8 times). In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a and a large opening opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (FIG. 6)). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. Can be visually recognized through the small window 35.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 and a second entrance (through gate) 67. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 5, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 has a frame opening flag 203a, a frame opening command transmission flag 203b, and a frame closing command transmission flag 203c. The frame release flag 203a is a flag indicating whether or not at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is open (that is, whether both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open). . The frame opening flag 203a is turned on when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, that is, when at least one of the inner frame switch SW1 or the front frame switch SW2 is turned on (conductive). The On the other hand, the frame opening flag 203a is turned off when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, that is, when both the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 are turned off (shut off). . Therefore, if the frame release flag 203a is on, it indicates that at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is being opened.

  The frame opening command transmission flag 203b is a flag indicating whether or not the frame opening command is transmitted once from the MPU 201 to the sound lamp control device 113 in association with at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 being opened. is there. The frame release command transmission flag 203b is first set to “off” in the main process (see FIG. 11) of the main controller 110 described later. When at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened and the MPU 201 transmits a frame opening command once, it is set to “ON”. The frame opening command transmission flag 203b indicates that the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), and a frame closing command is sent from the MPU 201 to the sound lamp control device 113. Once transmitted, it is set to “off” again.

  The frame closing command transmission flag 203c indicates that the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), and the MPU 201 sends the frame to the sound lamp control device 113 along with the closing. It is a flag indicating whether or not the close command has been transmitted once. The frame closing command transmission flag 203c is first set to “ON” in the main process (see FIG. 11) of the main controller 110 described later. When at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened and the MPU 201 transmits a frame opening command once, it is set to “off”. The frame closing command transmission flag 203c indicates that the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), and the MPU 201 transmits a frame closing command once. , It is set to “ON” again.

  The reason why the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is first set to “ON” in the main process (see FIG. 11) of the main controller 110 will be described. For example, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is started due to a store opening preparation or the like, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are normally closed. Here, the frame closing command is a command transmitted once when the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is closed (when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed). . Therefore, if both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, it can be considered that the frame closing command has already been transmitted once by the MPU 201. Therefore, the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is first set to “ON” in the main process of the main controller 110. In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started, even if at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened (the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is not closed, the frame The frame closing command transmission flag 203c is set to “ON” even if the closing command has not been transmitted yet, but when the MPU 201 transmits a frame opening command once thereafter, the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is Normal value is set to “off”. Therefore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started, there is no problem even if at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened.

  The RAM 203 stores not only the above flags but also a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. Is provided with a work area (work area) in which the value is stored. The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 11), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 10) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a specific prize. A solenoid 209 comprising a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the opening 65a as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the like is connected.

  The inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 are connected to the input / output port 205. The on / off state of the inner frame switch SW1 and the on / off state of the front frame switch SW2 are detected by the MPU 201 by being input to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Since the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 are connected in parallel, when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the opening is detected by the MPU 201.

  An external output terminal plate 261 is connected to the input / output port 205. The external output terminal board 261 is configured so that a hall computer 262 can be connected thereto. The external output terminal board 261 receives a signal or data output from the main controller 110 (for example, a frame open signal indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open), Signals and data are relayed to the hall computer 262.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to a bus line BL1 for transmitting various commands to the sound lamp control device 113 and a bus line BL2 for transmitting a strobe signal SG3 to the sound lamp control device 113. When various commands (for example, a frame open command or a frame close command) are started to be transmitted by the MPU 201 to the sound lamp control device 113 via the bus line BL1, the MPU 201 transmits a strobe signal to the sound lamp control device 113 via the bus line BL2. SG3 is output. When the audio lamp control device 113 (MPU 221) receives the strobe signal SG3 transmitted from the MPU 201 via the bus line BL2, it starts receiving various commands transmitted from the MPU 201 via the bus line BL1.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 on the condition that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. Then, the launch solenoid is excited, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is a voice output in a voice output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and the display control device 114. The setting of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 performed etc. is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes a frame opening flag 223a, a frame opening notification count counter 223b, a frame opening notification timing counter 223c, a frame closing notification flag 223d, a frame closing notification count counter 223e, and a frame closing notification timing. It has a counter 223f and a command reception memory 223g.

  Similarly to the frame release flag 203a provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the frame release flag 223a is set to determine whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14). Is a flag indicating whether or not the file is open. If the frame opening flag 223a is on, the frame opening process for notifying by light emission that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open using the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. (See FIG. 24) is executed. The frame opening flag 223a is turned on when a frame opening command indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been opened is received from the main controller 110, while the opened inner frame 12 is opened. Alternatively, it is turned off when a frame closing command is received from the main controller 110 indicating that the front frame 14 is closed (indicating that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed).

  The frame opening notification frequency counter 223b performs the number of times of light emission notification by the frame opening process (see FIG. 24) executed during one opening when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. It is a counter which counts. This frame opening notification number counter 223b is cleared to 0 every time a frame opening command is received from the main controller 110, and is set to 1 every time the notification mode by light emission for the opening of at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is switched. Is added.

  The frame opening notification timing counter 223c is a counter that measures the switching interval (period) of the notification mode of notification by light emission executed in the frame opening processing (see FIG. 24). This frame opening notification time counter 223c is a predetermined time (this implementation) which is an execution interval of the frame opening process (see FIG. 24) executed while at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. In the embodiment, 1 is added every 1 ms). Then, when the frame opening notification time counter 223c reaches the timing of switching the notification mode by the light emission performed by the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 during the frame opening processing (see FIG. 24). Is cleared to 0. Also, the frame open notification time counter 223c is cleared to 0 when a frame open command is received.

  When the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is closed (when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), the frame closing notification flag 223d is displayed for a predetermined period (this embodiment). Then, the frame closing process (see FIG. 26) for notifying by light emission that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been previously opened is performed using the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. It is a flag for This frame closing notification flag 223d is a frame opening notification process indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened (see FIG. 24). Turns on when is done. When the frame closing notification flag 223d is turned on, when the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed (when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), the frame 12 or the front frame A frame closing process (see FIG. 26) is performed to notify that 14 has been previously opened using the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. The frame closing notification flag 223d is turned off when the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is closed and a predetermined period (30 s in this embodiment) has elapsed since the closing.

  The frame closing notification number counter 223e is a frame closing process that is executed when the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is closed (when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed) (see FIG. 26)). This frame closing notification frequency counter 223e is cleared to 0 each time a frame closing command is received from the main control device 110, and is set to 1 every time the notification mode by light emission for closing of the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is switched. Is added.

  The frame closing notification time counter 223f is a counter that measures the switching interval (period) of the notification mode of notification by light emission executed in the frame closing processing (see FIG. 26). This frame closing notification time counter 223f is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, an execution interval of frame closing processing (see FIG. 26) executed when the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is closed). 1 is added every 1 ms). Then, when the frame closing notification time counter 223f reaches the timing for switching the notification mode by the light emission performed by the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 during the frame closing processing (see FIG. 26). Is cleared to 0. The frame closing notification time counter 223f is also cleared to 0 when a frame closing command is received.

  The command reception memory 223g is a memory for storing various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 via the bus line BL1. In the command reception memory 223g, in addition to the frame opening command and the frame closing command, a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, an effect time addition command, etc. required for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, etc. Is memorized. Note that the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 decodes the command stored in the command reception memory 223g and performs control according to the decoded command.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The lamp display device 227 switches the mode of notification by light emission of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 according to whether or not the signals (voltages) input to the IN1 terminal and the IN2 terminal are on in a maximum of four stages. Device. The lamp display device 227 is constituted by a circuit that switches the illumination modes 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 and the notification mode by the light emission of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. It should be noted that the mode of notification by light emission of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 that are switched by the lamp display device 227 in a maximum of four stages indicates that the illuminance of light emission by red is switched in a maximum of four stages.

  Here, a specific configuration of the lamp display device 227 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the lamp display device 227. In FIG. 7, a circuit connected to the display lamp 34 is shown as a representative. As for the illumination parts 29 to 33, the same circuit as the circuit connected to the display lamp 34 shown in FIG. 7 is provided in the lamp display device 227, and the IN1 terminal and the IN2 terminal of each provided circuit are displayed. Similar to the lamp 34, the lamp 34 is connected to an output port serving as another address in the input / output port 225. Therefore, the illustrations of the illumination units 29 to 33 are omitted and the description thereof is omitted.

  A circuit connected to the display lamp 34 includes AND circuits AND1 to AND3, logic negation circuits NOT1 to NOT2, field effect transistors FET1 to FET3 as switching elements, resistors R1 to R7, and a DC power source DC1. Has been. Here, the resistors R1 to R6 have the same resistance value.

  Since the power supply terminals (not shown) of the DC power supply DC1, AND circuits AND1 to AND3, and NOT circuits NOT1 to NOT2 are connected to the power supply unit 251 by a power supply line (not shown), the DC power supply DC1 and the AND circuit AND1. ˜AND3 and logic negation circuits NOT1 to NOT2 are supplied with a DC voltage of 5 volts supplied from the power supply unit 251.

  The DC power source DC1 is a power source that supplies a DC voltage of 5 volts to a circuit connected to the display lamp 34, and an output terminal of the DC power source DC1 is a resistor that limits the DC current supplied together with the DC voltage from the DC power source DC1. It is connected to one end of R7. The other end of the resistor R7 is connected to each drain terminal of the field effect transistors FET1 to FET3.

  The source terminal of the field effect transistor FET1 is connected to one end of the resistor R1, and the other end of the resistor R1 is connected to the anode terminal of the display lamp 34 composed of a red light emitting diode. The cathode terminal of the display lamp 34 is grounded.

  The source terminal of the field effect transistor FET2 is connected to one end of the resistor R2, and the other end of the resistor R2 is connected to one end of the resistor R3. The other end of the resistor R3 is connected to the anode terminal of the display lamp 34 composed of a red light emitting diode.

  The source terminal of the field effect transistor FET3 is connected to one end of the resistor R4, and the other end of the resistor R4 is connected to one end of the resistor R5. The other end of the resistor R5 is connected to one end of the resistor R6, and the other end of the resistor R6 is connected to the anode terminal of the display lamp 34 composed of a red light emitting diode.

  The gate terminal of the field effect transistor FET1 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit AND1. One input terminal of the AND circuit AND1 is connected to the input / output port 225 via the IN1 terminal, and the other input terminal of the AND circuit AND1 is connected to the input / output port 225 via the IN2 terminal. It is connected.

  The gate terminal of the field effect transistor FET2 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit AND2. One input terminal of the AND circuit AND2 is connected to the input / output port 225 via the IN1 terminal, and the other input terminal of the AND circuit AND2 is connected to the output terminal of the logic NOT circuit NOT1. Yes. The input terminal of the logical NOT circuit NOT1 is connected to the input / output port 225 via the IN2 terminal.

  The gate terminal of the field effect transistor FET3 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit AND3. One input terminal of the AND circuit AND3 is connected to the output terminal of the logic NOT circuit NOT2. The input terminal of the logical NOT circuit NOT2 is connected to the input / output port 225 via the IN1 terminal. The other input terminal of the AND circuit AND3 is connected to the input / output port 225 via the IN2 terminal.

  With the above connection, the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is 5 volts, that is, ON, and the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is 5 volts, that is, If it is on, a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the output terminal of the AND circuit AND1, and the field effect transistor FET1 becomes conductive. At this time, since zero volt is output from the output terminals of the AND circuits AND2 and AND3, the field effect transistors FET2 and FET3 are cut off. Thus, if the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is on and the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is on, the field effect transistor FET1. Therefore, a DC voltage obtained by dropping the DC voltage supplied from the DC voltage DC1 by the resistor R7 and the resistor R1 is applied to the display lamp 34.

  Also, the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is 5 volts, that is, on, while the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is zero volts, that is, off. For example, a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the output terminal of the AND circuit AND2, and the field effect transistor FET2 becomes conductive. At this time, since zero volt is output from the output terminals of the AND circuits AND1 and AND3, the field effect transistors FET1 and FET3 are cut off. In this way, if the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is on, while the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is off, the field effect transistor Since the FET 2 becomes conductive, a DC voltage obtained by dropping the DC voltage supplied from the DC voltage DC1 by the resistors R7, R2 and R3 is applied to the display lamp 34.

  Further, the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is zero volts, that is, off, while the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is 5 volts, that is, ON. For example, a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the output terminal of the AND circuit AND3, and the field effect transistor FET3 becomes conductive. At this time, since zero volt is output from the output terminals of the AND circuits AND1 and AND2, the field effect transistors FET1 and FET2 are cut off. As described above, if the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is OFF, while the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is ON, the field effect transistor Since the FET 3 becomes conductive, a DC voltage obtained by dropping the DC voltage supplied from the DC voltage DC1 by the resistors R7, R4, R5, and R6 is applied to the display lamp 34.

  Finally, if the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is zero volts, that is, off, and the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is zero volts, that is, off. Since zero volts is output from the output terminals of the AND circuits AND1 to AND3, the field effect transistors FET1 to FET3 are all cut off. Thus, if the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is OFF and the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is OFF, the field effect transistor FET1. Since all of the FET3 are cut off, the DC voltage supplied from the DC voltage DC1 is not applied to the display lamp 34.

  Here, as described above, since the resistors R1 to R6 all have the same resistance value, the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is ON, and output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal. When the signal (voltage) to be applied is ON, the voltage applied to the display lamp 34 becomes the maximum value, and the illuminance (red illuminance) due to the light emission of the display lamp 34 becomes the maximum. Hereinafter, the case where the illuminance due to red light emission of the display lamp 34 (including each of the illumination units 29 to 33) becomes maximum is referred to as “maximum illuminance”.

  When the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is on, while the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is off, the display lamp 34 The voltage applied to is higher next to the maximum value (second highest), and the illuminance due to the light emitted from the display lamp 34 is next higher than the maximum illuminance (second highest). Hereinafter, a case where the illuminance due to red light emission of the display lamp 34 (including each of the illumination units 29 to 33) becomes the second highest is referred to as “second illuminance”.

  When the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is off, while the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is on, the display lamp 34 The voltage applied to the second is the second highest (third highest), and the illuminance due to the light emitted from the display lamp 34 is next higher than the second illuminance (third highest). Hereinafter, a case where the illuminance due to red light emission of the display lamp 34 (including each of the illumination units 29 to 33) becomes the third highest is referred to as “third illuminance”.

  When the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is OFF and the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is OFF, the display lamp 34 The applied voltage becomes zero volts, and the display lamp 34 does not emit light. Hereinafter, a case where the display lamp 34 (including each of the illumination units 29 to 33) does not emit light is referred to as “light off”.

  As described above, the circuit connected to the display lamp 34 depends on the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal and the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal. The voltage applied to the display lamp 34 is changed in a maximum of four stages. As a result, the display lamp 34 changes the illuminance of red light emission in a maximum of four stages and performs notification by light emission.

  The display lamp 34 (including each of the lighting units 29 to 33) changes the illuminance of red light emission and performs notification by light emission, but changes the illuminance of blue or yellow light emission instead of red. Thus, notification by light emission may be performed.

  Here, as described above, for the illumination units 29 to 33, the same circuit as the circuit connected to the display lamp 34 is provided in the lamp display device 227, and the IN1 terminal and the IN2 terminal of the provided circuit, respectively. However, since each of the illumination units 29 to 33 emits light independently, the illuminance due to the light emission can also be changed independently.

  Returning to the description of FIG. The display control device 114 controls the change display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. It has.

  The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the symbol display command input from the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs, and has an inner frame release flag 233a.

  Similarly to the frame release flag 203a provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the frame release flag 233a indicates whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14). Is a flag indicating whether or not the file is open. If the frame opening flag 223a is on, it indicates that at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is being opened. The frame opening flag 223a is turned on when a frame opening command indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened is received from the sound lamp control device 113, while the opened inner frame is opened. 12 or the front frame 14 is turned off when a frame close command is received from the sound lamp controller 113 indicating that the front frame 14 is closed (indicating that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed).

  In addition, the work RAM 233 includes, as flags (not shown), an effect permission flag that indicates whether or not the effect is permitted, and a variation start flag that indicates whether or not the variable display should be started. The effect permission flag (not shown) is turned on when an effect permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is received via the sound lamp control device 113, and turned off when the power is cut off. . The variation start flag (not shown) is turned on when a command corresponding to the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation display. Is turned off when is started.

  The character ROM 235 has a character information memory (not shown) in which character information such as symbols (background symbols and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. Character information stored in the character information memory (not shown) includes numerical data of the third symbol (for example, 0 to 9) that is variably displayed, and symbol data other than the numerical data (for example, a box symbol or a helmet symbol). A design (see FIG. 7B)), a background design, a notice character design, a character design (for example, a boy (see FIG. 7B)), and the like are stored.

  In the character information memory, the character information as described above is stored as compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In this embodiment, the character information is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the character information of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character information memory. When the character information stored in the character information memory as compressed data is read out, it is decompressed and written in a character information storage area (not shown) of the video RAM 234.

  The video RAM 234 is a storage area for display (not shown) in which effect data corresponding to display contents (effect display pattern of variable display, effect contents at reach effect, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. And a character information storage area (not shown) in which data obtained by decompressing compressed character information stored in a character information memory (not shown) of the character ROM 235 is stored.

  The display storage area (not shown) stores effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By rewriting the contents of the display storage region, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are changed. Be changed. In addition, in a character information storage area (not shown), character data serving as a material such as background symbols and decorative symbols is stored, and necessary data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character information storage area. Then, it is written in a display storage area (not shown).

  The character information is stored in a character information storage area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 because the processing speed is generally higher in the RAM than in the ROM, and the character information is directly read from the character ROM 235. This is because when writing directly to a display storage area (not shown), if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read and smooth display cannot be performed or clear display cannot be performed. Furthermore, this is because it is easy to process display data in the RAM (for example, change the size of the decorative design or change the color of the background design).

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timing of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data and the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data. A payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9” and one type of sub-shaped petal shape formed smaller than this main symbol. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box almost fully, and attached symbols imitating characters such as furoshiki and helmets are added. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. It is configured as follows. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added is arranged. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are arranged. Here, the high probability state refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). Further, the normal state (low probability state) refers to a time when the probability of hitting is not probable, and refers to a state where the probability of jackpot is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that during probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. For this reason, a total of 20 third symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub-designs are set in each symbol row, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scrolls from top to bottom with periodicity. The display is changed. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. In the main display area Dm, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set. In each game, the variable display stops in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and the combination of jackpot symbols on one of the active lines at the time of the stop (in this embodiment, the same Jackpot animations are displayed as jackpots.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are usually covered with double-open opaque doors that are electrically opened and closed by solenoids (not shown), and sometimes the solenoids are excited and the doors are on the front side. It is a display area that is visible to the player when it is opened. The center notice area Ds2 is a display area that is always visible without being covered by the door.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, in the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols and sub-designs of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are covered and the display screen cannot be visually recognized. If either one of the left and right doors or both doors are opened during the variable display, a video is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and it is easy for the player to change to a big hit than usual. It is suggested. In the center notice area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds in principle, but the third symbol and characters are displayed larger across the display areas Dm and Ds. A display effect can be performed.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 11), or at an interval of 2 ms, an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Stored in the counter buffer. The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball winning timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed. It is updated once and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 11). The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in The number of random number values that are jackpots is set at low probability and high probability, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots at low probability is 2, and the value is “373, 727” There are 14 random numbers that are big hits at high probability, and the values are "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733".

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit, and in this embodiment, one by one is added in order within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value (that is, After reaching 4), it is configured to return to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in In addition, the value of the random number that becomes a high probability state after the jackpot is “1, 2, 3”, the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the jackpot is “0, 4”, and two types of hits are determined. The Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots of a high probability state and a low probability state, and one type of display mode corresponding to a deviation. Any one of the three display modes is selected.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than out of front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) after the occurrence of reach, and the final stop symbol is stopped before and after the reach symbol. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected as “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored.

  Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random number values from which the stop pattern is selected. This is based on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored (that is, the number of reservations), etc. This is to change the stop pattern selection ratio.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide random value range of 10 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected so that a jackpot is likely to occur and a reach effect is not selected more than necessary. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9, making it difficult to select “rear out of front / rear out of reach” or “reach out of front / rear out of reach”. Further, if each random number value is not stored in the holding ball storage area in a low probability state, a disturbance corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely off” in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. A table with a narrow numerical value range of 51 to 238 is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 9 to 50, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and therefore, the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. On the other hand, the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined by the first variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines a variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops after the reach occurs. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 11) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

  For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third variation type counter”. The 3rd symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs the decorative production according to the display mode of the 1st symbol display device 37. A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, the time required for the notice effect is added to the variable time, or on the contrary, the variable time is subtracted to shorten the variable display time, or an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the variable time is selected. . As with the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables with different ranges of random values from which the production pattern is selected, and whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. Depending on the low probability state or in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random value is stored, the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, and the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. Acquired when is detected. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 11).

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 18. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer allocation that is started periodically (in a 2 ms cycle in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 every 2 ms, for example. In this timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S701). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S703). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When reaching 738, 4, 238, 250), respectively, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a start winning process (see FIG. 17) accompanying the winning at the first entrance 64 is executed (S704), a firing control process is executed (S705), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with a touch sensor and turns on / off the launch of the ball on the condition that the launch stop switch for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining OFF. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the start winning process executed in the process of S704 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S704) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S801). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S801: Yes), whether or not the number N of actuated balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). Is determined (S802). If there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S802: Yes), the number of reserved balls N is incremented by 1 (S803), and further updated in step S703. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the free reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S804). On the other hand, if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S801: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the number N of active reserve balls is not less than 4 (S802: No). , S803 and S804 are skipped, the start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout and emission control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, referring to FIG. 10, a startup process when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance in the stack pointer is set, and the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. In order to wait, wait processing (1 s in this embodiment) is executed. Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S214 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the main process executed after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process of a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 and the frame opening / closing monitoring process of S216 are executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, the frame opening command transmission flag 203b is set to OFF, and the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is set to ON (S207). Thereby, the initial setting of the frame opening command transmission flag 203b and the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is completed (S207). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S201.

  In the process of S201, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S201). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S701 is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, by this external output process, a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, an effect time addition command, etc. necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2, and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the big win state (S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is obtained. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  After the process of S206, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S208). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S208: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 The power failure signal SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S209). If the predetermined time has already passed (S209: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S209: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are repeatedly updated (S210, S211).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S210). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S211). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  After the processing of S211, frame opening / closing monitoring processing is executed (S216). Details of the frame opening / closing monitoring process (S216) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are not closed, that is, when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, this frame open / close monitoring is performed. In the process, a process for temporarily stopping the game is executed.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S208, if power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S208: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) has been executed, the process at the time of power-off in S212 to S215 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S212), and a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). It transmits to (S213). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S214), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S215), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  The process of S208 is the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206, or the end of one cycle of the processes of S210, S211 and S216 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S207. That is, the process can be started from the process of S207 as in the case where the initialization process is initialized. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S207. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the variation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 11). In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of active suspension balls is greater than 0 (S303). If the number N of active balls is 0 (S303: No), this process is terminated as it is. If the number of the operation holding balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the operation holding ball number N is decremented by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the holding ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and the reserved first area → execution area, reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area. After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the change type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). Whether or not the stop symbol is set is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit, the symbol that becomes a high probability state after the big hit by the value of the first hit type counter C2 Or a symbol that is in a low probability state is determined. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when the high probability state is reached after the big hit, the green LED is turned on when the low probability state is reached, and the blue LED is turned on when it is off. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S309, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S310). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this stop command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and receives the stop command, whereby one variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 ends.

  Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) executed in the change process (see FIG. 12). In the variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, “373,727” is a winning value among the values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1 at the normal low probability, and “59,109,163, 211,263,317,367, "421,479,523,631,683,733" is the winning value.

  When it is determined that it is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode for the big hit is set (S402). ). In the process of S402, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, whether to shift to the high probability state or shift to the low probability state after the big hit is set. When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit by the process of S402. Of the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, when “0, 4”, the state shifts to the low probability state, and when “1, 2, 3”, the state shifts to the high probability state. .

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. The At this time, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and rough symbol fluctuations such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition to determining the variation time, the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. To do.

  The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation time, and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are respectively defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the fluctuation time can be set using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and can be set only with the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Whether or not to set with both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time.

  If it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, An effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to indicate whether the reach is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 varies depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state and the number of operation suspensions N. So the table is set up.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the detachment symbol. Is determined. At this time, as in the process of S403, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and the normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 , The number of variation symbols).

  When the process of S403 or the process of S405 is completed, the effect time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by the first and second type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S406). At this time, the addition / subtraction of effect time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display The variation time of the device 81 is set. In this embodiment, the addition / subtraction of the production time is determined according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3 when the variation display time is not changed and when the variation display time is added for one second, the variation display time is set to 2 seconds. In the case of addition, four types of addition values for the case of subtracting 1 second from the variable display time are determined.

  In addition, when the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect that increases the expected value of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect that causes the change time of the variable symbol to be longer than usual and is accompanied by a slip) An effect of displaying a notice character is produced, for example, an effect of making the change time of one change symbol shorter than usual and stopping it immediately). In addition, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that an added value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, so that the player expects a big hit by confirming the notice effect. Can do.

  Next, a variation pattern command is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S403 or S405 (S407), and a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S402 or S404. (S408). Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the added value of the effect time determined in the process of S406 (S409), and the process returns to the variation process.

  Next, the frame opening / closing monitoring process (S216) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the frame opening / closing monitoring process (S216) executed in the main process (see FIG. 11). In this frame open / close monitoring process (S216), first, it is determined whether or not the inner frame switch SW1 or the front frame switch SW2 is on (S501), and if the inner frame switch SW1 or the front frame switch SW2 is on ( (S501: Yes) Since at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the frame opening flag 203a is turned on (S502).

  After the process of S502, output of the frame open signal to the external output terminal board 261 is started (S503), and the process proceeds to S504. The open frame signal output to the external output terminal plate 261 by the processing of S503 is transmitted to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261. The hall computer 262 can detect that at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is open by receiving a frame open signal via the external output terminal board 261.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S501 that the inner frame switch SW1 or the front frame switch SW2 is on (S501: No), the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 are off. Since both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the frame release flag 203a is turned off (S507).

  After the process of S507, the frame open signal being output is stopped (S508), and the process proceeds to S504. When the frame open signal is stopped by the processing of S508, the hall computer 262 that has received the frame open signal via the external output terminal board 261 indicates that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 have been closed. Can be detected.

  In the process of S504, either a frame opening command indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, or a frame closing command indicating that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. In response to the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 or the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14, a frame command transmission process for transmitting the command to the sound lamp controller 113 is executed (S 504).

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, when the frame opening command is output in the process of S <b> 504, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the frame opening command and stores it in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The provided frame release flag 223a is turned on. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 can detect the opening of at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 by the frame opening command output from the main control device 110.

  When the frame closing command is output in the process of S504, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the frame closing command and turns off the frame opening flag 223a of the voice lamp control device 113. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 can detect the closing of both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 by the frame closing command output by the processing of S504.

  After the processing of S504, it is determined whether or not the frame opening flag 203a is on, that is, whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened (S505).

  If the frame release flag 203a is turned on by the process of S505 (S505: Yes), the process proceeds to the game stop process (S506). That is, when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, a game stop process (S506) is executed.

  In this game stop process (S506), a process for temporarily stopping the game state is executed and a frame open signal is output to the external output terminal board 261. After execution of the game stop process (S506), the process proceeds to S501, and the states of the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 are repeatedly monitored. In this game stop process (S506), it is also confirmed whether or not the power-off information is stored in the RAM 203 as in S208, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 203. If it is confirmed, the process proceeds to S212 (see FIG. 11).

  On the other hand, if the frame opening flag 203a is turned off by the process of S505 (S505: No), the frame closing monitoring process (S216) is terminated after executing the frame closing process (S509), and the main process Return to FIG. Therefore, when neither the inner frame 12 nor the front frame 14 is opened (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), a frame closing process (S509) is executed.

  When this frame closing process (S509) is executed when the gaming state is stopped by opening at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14, the gaming state stopped by the opening Execute the process to restore On the other hand, when it is executed when the gaming state is not stopped, that is, when it is executed when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are kept closed, the frame is not performed. The release monitoring process (S216) ends.

  Next, the frame command transmission process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a frame command transmission process executed in the frame open / close monitoring process (see FIG. 14). In this frame command transmission process, first, it is determined whether or not the frame release flag 203a is on, that is, whether or not at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened (S611).

  If it is determined that the frame opening flag 203a is on (S611: Yes), at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened, so that the frame opening command and the strobe signal SG3 are sent to the sound lamp control device. The process proceeds to S612 and subsequent processes, which are processes to be transmitted to 113. In the process of S612, it is determined whether or not the frame release command transmission flag 203b is off. If it is determined that the frame open command transmission flag 203b is off (S612: Yes), a frame open command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 after at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened. Since it has not been transmitted yet, transmission of a frame release command is started to transmit this (S613). Thereafter, processing is waited for 1 μs (S614), and transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is started (S615). When the strobe signal SG3 is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 starts receiving a frame opening command. It is output from the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 that, after starting transmission of the frame release command, waits for 1 μs in the process of S614 and then starts transmitting the strobe signal SG3. This is to stabilize the frame release command.

  After the process of S615, it is determined whether 1 μs has elapsed from the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (from the start of the process of S615) (S616). If 1 μs has elapsed from the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (S616: Yes), the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is terminated (S617). Through the processing of S614 to S617, the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is started 1 μs after the start of transmission of the frame release command, and the strobe signal SG3 that has started transmission is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 for 1 μs (strobe). The pulse width of the signal SG3 is 1 μs).

  On the other hand, if 1 μs has not elapsed since the start of the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (S616: No), the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is not ended (the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is continued), and this frame command transmission process is ended. To do. Whether or not 1 μs has elapsed since the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is determined by the time measured by a counter (provided in the MPU 201, not shown) that counts the elapsed time since the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3. Judgment based on. The same applies to each processing of S626 described later.

  When the process of S617 is executed, it is determined whether 1 ms has elapsed from the start of transmission of the frame release command (S618). If 1 ms has elapsed from the start of transmission of the frame release command (S618: Yes), transmission of the frame release command is terminated (S619). Through the processing of S613, S618, and S619, a frame opening command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 for 1 ms. On the other hand, if 1 ms has not elapsed since the start of transmission of the frame release command (S618: No), the transmission of the frame release command is not ended (while the frame release command continues to be transmitted), and this frame command transmission processing ends. To do. Whether or not 1 ms has elapsed since the start of transmission of the frame release command is determined by the time measured by a counter (provided in the MPU 201, not shown) that counts the elapsed time from the start of transmission of the frame release command. Judgment based on.

  When the process of S619 is executed, the frame open command transmission flag 203b is turned on because the transmission of the frame open command to the sound lamp control device 113 is completed (S620). Thereafter, the frame closing command transmission counter 203c is turned off (S621). The frame opening command has already been transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S613 to S619, but since the frame closing command has not been transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 yet, the frame closing command is transmitted in the processing of S621. The flag 203c is set off.

  If the frame open command transmission counter 203b is turned on in the process of S612 (S612: No), a frame open command indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been opened is sent to the sound lamp control device 113. Since it has already been transmitted once, the processing of S613 to S621 is skipped, and this frame command transmission processing is terminated.

  Here, 1 μs elapses from the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (determined as “Yes” in the process of S616) and until 1 ms elapses from the start of transmission of the frame release command (“Yes” in the process of S618). In other words, until the frame release command transmission flag 203b is turned on, “Yes” is continuously determined in the process of S612. At this time, the processing of S613 to S615 executed after it is determined as “Yes” in the processing of S612 is configured to be skipped after being executed once for the first time. That is, until the frame release command transmission flag 203b is turned on, it is determined as “Yes” in the process of S612. In this case, if the processes of S613 to S615 have already started, the processes of S613 to S615 are performed. The process is configured to skip and proceed to the process of S616. Therefore, the processes of S613 to S615 are not repeatedly executed more than once until the frame release command transmission flag 203b is turned on.

  Next, when it is determined in the processing of S611 that the frame release flag 203a is off (S611: No), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, so the frame closing command and the strobe are closed. The process proceeds to S622 and subsequent processes, which are processes for transmitting the signal SG3 to the sound lamp control device 113. In the process of S622, it is determined whether or not the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is off. If the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is off (S622: Yes), since both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the frame closing command has not been transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, In order to transmit, transmission of a frame closing command is started (S623). Thereafter, processing is waited for 1 μs (S624), and transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is started (S625). When this strobe signal SG3 is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 starts receiving a frame closing command. Note that after starting transmission of the frame closing command, the processing waits for 1 μs in the processing of S624, and then transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is started for the same reason as in the case of the frame opening command (command Stabilization).

  After the process of S625, it is determined whether 1 μs has elapsed from the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (from the start of the process of S625) (S626). If 1 μs has elapsed from the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (S626: Yes), the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is terminated (S627). By the processing of S624 to S627, the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is started 1 μs after the start of transmission of the frame closing command, and the strobe signal SG3 that has started transmission is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 for 1 μs (strobe). The pulse width of the signal SG3 is 1 μs).

  On the other hand, if 1 μs has not elapsed since the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (S626: No), the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is not completed (the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is continued), and this frame command transmission process is terminated. To do.

  When the process of S627 is executed, it is determined whether 1 ms has elapsed since the transmission of the frame closing command was started (S628). If 1 ms has passed since the transmission start of the frame closing command (S628: Yes), the transmission of the frame closing command is terminated (S629). By the processing of S623, S628, and S629, the frame closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 for 1 ms. On the other hand, if 1 ms has not elapsed since the start of transmission of the frame closing command (S628: No), the transmission of the frame closing command is terminated without terminating transmission of the frame closing command (while continuing to transmit the frame closing command). To do. Whether or not 1 ms has elapsed since the start of transmission of the frame closing command is determined by the time measured by a counter (not shown) that counts the elapsed time since the transmission of the frame closing command is started. Judgment based on.

  When the process of S629 is executed, the transmission of the frame closing command to the sound lamp control device 113 is completed, so the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is turned on (S630). Thereafter, the frame release command transmission flag 203b is turned off (S631). The frame closing command has already been transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S623 to S629, but since the frame opening command has not yet been transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the frame opening command is transmitted in the processing of S631. The flag 203b is set to OFF.

  If the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is ON in the process of S622 (S622: No), the frame closing command indicating that the opened inner frame 12 or the opened front frame 14 is closed is controlled by the sound lamp control. Since it has already been transmitted once to the device 113, the processing of S623 to S631 is skipped, and this frame command transmission processing is terminated.

  Here, 1 μs elapses from the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (determined as “Yes” in the process of S626) and 1 ms elapses from the start of transmission of the frame closing command (“Yes” in the process of S628). In other words, until the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is turned on, “Yes” is continuously determined in the process of S622. At this time, the processing of S623 to S625, which is executed after it is determined as “Yes” in the processing of S622, is skipped after being executed once for the first time, similarly to the processing of S613 to S615 described above. Processing is configured. Therefore, the processes of S623 to S625 are not repeatedly executed more than once until the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is turned on.

  As described above, in the frame command transmission process (S504), when at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened and the frame opening command indicating the opening has not been transmitted yet, the main control device 110 The inner frame opening command is transmitted only once to the sound lamp control device 113 for 1 ms. When 1 μs has elapsed from the start of transmission of the inner frame release command, main controller 110 transmits strobe signal SG3 to audio lamp controller 113 only once for 1 μs.

  Similar to the frame opening command, the frame closing command is transmitted only once from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 only when the command has not yet been transmitted. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the number of command transmissions of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and the processing load in the main process can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 27, processing performed by the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and this start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1116 (see FIG. 20) is performed by an instant voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 20, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see the external interrupt processing in FIG. 22), it executes the power-off processing in S <b> 1116. The power-off processing flag is turned on before execution of the power-off processing, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1116 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1002: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1116, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 223 of an abnormality.

  In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). Since the power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 20), the power-off flag is turned on by the process in S1115 as described later with reference to FIG. In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1116 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1116 is not completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then the interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1008 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S1004 to S1006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process of S1009 is that when the process from S1004 to S1006 is reached via the process of S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the main process executed after the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started (S1101). If it is not determined that 1 ms or more has passed (S1101: No), S1102 is determined. The process proceeds to S1111 without performing the process of S1110. Whether or not 1 ms has elapsed in the processing of S1101 is processing related to display (production) in S1102 to S1109, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the counter update process and the command determination process of S1112 in a short cycle. Thus, when a command transmitted from main controller 110 is received, control according to the received command can be executed immediately.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1101 that 1 ms or more has elapsed (S1101: Yes), the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1107 described later. Is set (S1102), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S1103). The power-on notification process is a notification for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. . Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1104 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1104, a waiting-for-customer effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1105). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on the hold lamp 85 in accordance with the operation hold ball N is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1106). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the feeling of expectation for the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production which can have, or selecting one reach production out of a plurality of reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1106 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1107), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  Thereafter, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the change pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the effect time of the lamp editing process in S1107 and the sound editing / output process in S1108 is set.

  In the process of S1110, it corresponds to the state of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 (whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open, or both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed). And the frame state corresponding | compatible process (S1110) which performs the alert | report by the light emission performed by each lighting part 29-33 and the display lamp 34 is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1111. Details of the frame state handling process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1111, the variable display process of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. In this variation display process, a plurality of counters (a counter for setting a stop symbol at the time of big hit, a counter for selecting a stop symbol at the time of disconnection, etc.) mounted on the sound lamp control device 113 are updated. Based on the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command transmitted from the control device 110, the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set, or the variation display pattern (rear / rear out, front / rear non-rear reach, complete out) Etc. are set. The stop symbol and the variation pattern are transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.

  In the processing of S1111, for example, when the command of the variation pattern transmitted from the main control device 110 is “completely out”, a complete out A pattern is selected from a plurality of patterns corresponding to complete out, and the third symbol display A command is transmitted to the display control device 110 so that the device 81 can produce a completely off A pattern. Therefore, since the detailed variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 with respect to one variation pattern determined by the main control device 110, the control of the main control device 110 is performed. The burden can be reduced. Furthermore, since the pattern of each effect determined in the main controller 110 can be reduced, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced and the cost can be reduced.

  In the process of S1112, a command determination process for determining a command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S1112). If it is determined by this command determination processing that the received command is a command to be used by the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and the received command is displayed. If it is determined that the command is used by the control device 114, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The command determination process (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the command determination process (S1112) is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1116). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the storage of information on occurrence of power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter the display on the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the command determination process (S1112) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1112) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) described above.

  In this command determination process (S1112), first, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the command reception memory 223g is a frame open command (S1201).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the external interrupt processing for receiving various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 and storing them in the command reception memory 223g will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. This external interrupt process is executed when the strobe signal SG3 output from the main controller 110 is received (when the strobe signal SG3 is 5 volts). When the external interrupt process is executed, since various commands are started to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the various commands are received and the received various commands are stored in the command reception memory 223g. (S1301). Thereafter, the external interrupt process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in step S1201 that the frame open command is stored in the command reception memory 223g (S1201: Yes), either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open. The release flag 223a is turned on (S1202). If it is determined in step S1201 that the frame release command is stored in the command reception memory 223g (S1201: Yes), the frame release command is deleted from the command reception memory 223g. Therefore, the process of S1201 is not repeatedly executed. The same applies to the processing of S1206 described later.

  After the processing of S1202, the frame opening notification count counter 223b is cleared to 0 (S1203), the frame opening notification time counter 223c is cleared to 0 (S1204), and a frame opening command is output to the display control device 114 (S1205). Transition to processing. Although details will be described later, when a frame opening command is output by the processing of S1205, the display control device 114 receives the frame opening command and sets a frame opening flag 233a provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. Turn on. That is, the display control device 114 can detect the opening of at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 by the frame opening command output from the sound lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S1201 that the frame open command is stored in the command reception memory 223g (S1201: No), the processing in steps S1202 to S1205 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1206. .

  In the process of S1206, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the command reception memory 223g is a frame closing command (S1206). If it is determined by the processing of S1206 that a frame closing command is stored in the command reception memory 223g (S1206: Yes), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. 223a is turned off (S1207), the frame closing notification counter 223e is cleared to 0 (S1208), the frame closing notification time counter 223f is cleared to 0 (S1209), and a frame closing command is output to the display control device 114 (S1210). , The process proceeds to S1211. Although details will be described later, when a frame closing command is output by the processing of S1210, the display control device 114 receives the frame closing command and turns off the frame opening flag 233a. That is, the display control device 114 can detect the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 by the frame closing command output from the sound lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined that the frame closing command is stored in the command reception memory 223g by the process of S1206 (S1206: No), the process of S1207 to S1210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1211. To do.

  In the processing of S1211, processing according to other received commands is performed (S1211). After the process of S1211, the command determination process (S1112) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  Next, the frame state handling process (S1110) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a frame state handling process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this frame state handling process (S1110), first, it is determined whether the frame release flag 223a is on, that is, whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened (S1401). Here, if the frame release flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened, so that the frame opening process described later with reference to FIG. 24 is executed. (S1402), the frame state handling process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S1401 that the frame opening flag 223a is off (S1401: No), whether the frame closing notification flag 223d is on, that is, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 Is closed, and it is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined period (30 s in this embodiment) since the closure (S1403).

  If it is determined by the processing of S1403 that the frame closing notification flag 223d is on (S1403: Yes), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and a predetermined period (in this embodiment) from the closing. , 30s), a frame closing process described later with reference to FIG. 26 is executed (S1404), and the frame state handling process is terminated.

  If it is determined by the processing in S1403 that the frame closing notification flag 223d is off (S1403: No), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and a predetermined period (this implementation) In the embodiment, since 30 s) has passed, the frame state handling process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the above-described frame opening process (S1402) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a frame opening time process (S1402) executed in the frame state handling process (see FIG. 23).

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the frame opening time process (S1402) executed when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, first, 1 is added to the frame opening notification time counter 223c (S1501). The value of the frame opening notification time counter 223c is 1000, that is, the processing of the frame opening notification processing (S1503) is executed, and the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is the maximum illuminance or It is determined whether 1 s has elapsed since switching to either one of the light extinctions (S1502). Here, since the frame state corresponding process (S1110) in which the frame open process (S1402) is provided is executed every 1 ms (see FIG. 20), if the value of the frame open notification time counter 223c is 1000, It shows that 1 s has passed.

  If the value of the frame opening alarm timing counter 223c has not yet reached 1000 by the processing of S1502 (S1502: No), the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is either the maximum illuminance or the extinction Since 1 s has not elapsed since switching to one of these, without changing the mode of light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, that is, without adding to the frame opening notification number counter 223b. Then, a frame opening notification process is performed to notify the outside by light emission that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened (S1503). The frame opening notification process (S1503) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the frame opening notification process (S1503) is executed, the frame opening process (S1402) is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S1502 that the value of the frame opening notification time counter 223c is 1000 (S1502: Yes), the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is the maximum illuminance. Or, since 1 s has passed since switching to either one of the lights off, the frame opening alarm timing counter 223c is cleared to 0 (S1504), and the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 In order to switch the notification mode, 1 is added to the frame opening notification count counter 223b (S1505). Then, the voice output device 226 is used to give a voice notification that “the frame is open” (S1506). Thereafter, the frame opening process (S1402) is terminated.

  As described above, in the frame opening process, if 1 s has elapsed since the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 has switched to either the maximum illuminance or the extinction, the frame opening notification By adding 1 to the number counter 223b, the mode of notification by light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is switched, and the voice output device 226 is used to notify the user that “the frame is open”. I do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the above-described frame release notification process (S1503) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a frame opening notification process (S1503) executed in the frame opening process (see FIG. 24).

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the frame opening notification process (S1503) for notifying the outside by light emission that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, first, the value of the frame opening notification number counter 223b is , 0 or an even number is determined (S1601). When it is determined that the value of the frame opening notification number counter 223b is 0 or an even number (S1601: Yes), the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on, that is, 5 to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227. While outputting the voltage of volt | bolt, the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on, that is, the voltage of 5 volt is output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1602). Thereby, the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 has the maximum illuminance (see FIG. 7).

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the value of the frame opening notification number counter 223b is 0 or an even number (S1601: No), that is, when the value of the frame opening notification number counter 223b is an odd number, the lamp display device 227 is displayed. The output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, the voltage of zero volt is output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227, and the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, the A voltage of zero volts is output (S1603). Thereby, the voltage applied to each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 becomes zero volts, and the lighting of each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is not performed and is turned off.

  As described above, when at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened, the frame opening notification counter 223b that switches on / off in 1 s until both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. Depending on the state, each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 repeats light emission and extinction at the maximum illuminance (repeats blinking).

  In order to execute the above-described frame closing process (S1404) for a predetermined period (30 s in the present embodiment) when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed after the process of S1602 or S1603, The frame closing notification flag 223d is turned on (S1604), and the frame opening notification processing (S1503) is ended.

  Next, the frame closing process (S1404) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing frame closing processing (S1404) executed in the frame state handling processing (see FIG. 23).

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the frame closing process (S1404) executed when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and within a predetermined period (30 s in this embodiment) from the closing, First, 1 is added to the frame closing notification timing counter 223f (S1701), and the value of the frame closing notification timing counter 223f is 1000, that is, the processing of the frame closing notification processing (S1703) is executed, and each lighting unit It is determined whether or not 1 s has elapsed since the light emission performed by 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is switched to any one of the maximum illuminance, the second illuminance, the third illuminance, and the extinction (S1702). Here, since the frame state corresponding process (S1110) in which the frame closing process (S1404) is provided is executed every 1 ms (see FIG. 20), if the value of the frame closing notification time counter 223f is 1000, It shows that 1 s has passed.

  If the value of the frame closing notification time counter 223f has not yet reached 1000 by the processing of S1702 (S1702: No), the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is the maximum illuminance and the second illuminance. Since 1 s has not elapsed since switching to either the third illuminance or the extinction, the lighting mode performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is not switched, that is, the number of frame closing notifications Without adding to the counter 223e, a frame closing notification process for notifying the outside by light emission that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been opened is executed (S1703). The frame closing notification process (S1703) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after execution of the frame closing notification process (S1703), the frame closing process (S1404) is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S1702 that the value of the frame closing notification time counter 223f is 1000 (S1702: Yes), the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is the maximum illuminance. Since 1 s has passed since switching to any one of the second illuminance, the third illuminance, and the extinction, the frame closing notification time counter 223f is cleared to 0 (S1704), and each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display In order to switch the mode of notification by light emission performed by the lamp 34, 1 is added to the frame closing notification frequency counter 223e (S1705), and this frame closing processing (S1404) is ended.

  As described above, in the process at the time of closing the frame, 1 s elapses after the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is switched to any one of the maximum illuminance, the second illuminance, the third illuminance, and the extinction. If it is, the frame closing notification frequency counter 223e is incremented by 1 to switch the notification mode by the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the frame closing notification process (S1703) described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the frame closing notification process (S1703) executed in the frame closing process (see FIG. 26).

  As shown in FIG. 27, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been previously opened for a predetermined period (30 s in this embodiment) from the closing. In the frame closing notification process (S1703) for notifying the outside by light emission, it is first determined whether or not the value of the frame closing notification counter 223e is 30 (S1801). As described above, the frame closing notification number counter 223e is incremented by 1 every 1 s when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, so that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 30. For example, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and 30s, which is a predetermined period, has elapsed since the closing.

  If it is not determined in step S1801 that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 30 (S1801: No), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and a predetermined period from the closing 30s. Therefore, the process proceeds to S1802 and subsequent processes in which notification is performed by light emission of each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34.

  In the processing of S1802, it is determined whether or not the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 0 or a multiple of 4 (S1802). When it is determined that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 0 or a multiple of 4 (S1802: Yes), the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on, that is, the lamp display device 227 A voltage of 5 volts is output to the IN1 terminal and the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on, that is, a voltage of 5 volts is output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1803). Thereby, the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 has the maximum illuminance (see FIG. 7).

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 0 or a multiple of 4 (S1802: No), the process proceeds to S1804, and whether the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is an odd number. It is determined whether or not (S1804). When it is determined that the value of the frame closing notification frequency counter 223e is an odd number (S1804: Yes), the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on, that is, the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on. While outputting the voltage of volts, the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, the voltage of zero volts is outputted to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1805). Thereby, the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 becomes the second illuminance (see FIG. 7).

  If it is not determined in step S1804 that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is an odd number (S1804: No), the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, the lamp display device. While outputting a voltage of zero volts to the IN1 terminal of 227, the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on, that is, a voltage of 5 volts is output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1806). Thereby, the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 becomes the third illuminance (see FIG. 7).

  As described above, if the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is not 30, that is, if both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and a predetermined period of 30 s has not elapsed since the closing, S1803, The process of S1805 or S1806 is repeatedly executed, and the mode of notification by light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is set to maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance every 1 s. → Change in order of maximum illumination.

  When it is determined in the processing of S1801 that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 30 (S1801: Yes), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and a predetermined period has elapsed since the closing. Since 30 s have passed, the process proceeds to S1807 and the subsequent processes, which are processes for terminating the notification by the light emission of each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34.

  In the process of S1807, the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, a voltage of zero volts is output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227, and the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off. That is, a voltage of zero volts is output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1807). Thereby, the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is turned off (see FIG. 7).

  Thereafter, the frame closing notification flag 223d, which is a flag for executing the frame closing process (see FIG. 26), is turned off (S1808), and the frame closing return process is executed (S1809). In the frame closing return process (S1809), when a game temporarily stopped by opening at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in the main controller 110 is returned, an audio lamp is set in response to the return. This is processing for returning control by the control device 113. After the frame closing return processing (S1809) is executed, the frame closing notification processing is terminated.

  As described above, in the frame closing notification process (S1703), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and if the predetermined period of 30 s has not elapsed since the closing, the process of S1803, S1805 or S1806 is repeated. The mode of notification by light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is executed every 1 s except for the extinguishing state. Maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → Change in order of maximum illumination. And if 30 s which is a predetermined period has passed since closing, the light emission performed by each electrical decoration parts 29-33 and the display lamp 34 will be light-extinguished.

  Here, referring to FIG. 28, as a result of the above-described frame opening process (see FIG. 24) and frame closing process (see FIG. 26), light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. The manner of notification by will be described in detail. FIG. 28A shows each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the frame opening process is executed. FIG. 28 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a mode of notification by light emission performed by the lamp 34. FIG. 28 (b) shows a state in which both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, and the predetermined state from the closing. It is the schematic diagram which showed the aspect of the alerting | reporting by light emission performed by each illumination part 29-33 and the display lamp 34 when the process at the time of a frame closure is performed during a period (for 30 s in this embodiment). In FIGS. 28A and 28B, the black circle “●” indicates the timing at which the notification mode by light emission is switched.

  When at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, a frame opening process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and first, as shown in FIG. And the red light emission performed by the display lamp 34 is a notification mode in which the maximum illuminance is achieved. Then, when 1 s has passed since the opening of at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, the red light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is turned off. Thereafter, the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is a notification mode in which the maximum illuminance and the turn-off are repeated every 1 s (a notification mode by red flashing). The red light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is repeatedly executed until both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. When both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the pachinko machine 10 ends the frame opening process (see FIG. 24) (ends the notification mode by flashing red) and closes the frame. The notification process (see FIG. 26) is executed.

  Next, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the frame closing process (see FIG. 26) is executed for a predetermined period of 30 s from the closing. In the frame closing process (see FIG. 26), as shown in FIG. 28 (b), first, a red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is a notification mode in which the maximum illuminance is achieved. Then, when 1 s has elapsed since both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 becomes a notification mode in which the second illuminance is obtained. Next, when 1 s elapses after the red light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 reaches the second illuminance, the red light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is the first. It becomes the mode of notification which becomes 3 illuminance. After that, when 1 s has elapsed since the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 has reached the third illuminance, the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is again performed. It becomes the mode of notification which becomes the 2nd illuminance. Furthermore, when 1 s has elapsed since the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 again becomes the second illuminance, the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is performed. This is a notification mode in which the maximum illuminance is reached again. That is, the mode of notification by red light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is set to maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum every 1 s except for the light-off state. Change in order of illuminance. The red light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is repeatedly executed until both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and a predetermined period of 30 seconds elapses from the closing. The

  As described above, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the pachinko machine 10 notifies each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 by light emission for a predetermined period of 30 seconds from the closing. Do. Therefore, even if at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, for example, cheating is performed, and then the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed within a short time, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed. It can be notified by light emission that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been previously opened for 30 s from the closing. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts performed on the pachinko machine 10. It should be noted that the above-mentioned fraudulent acts are each control device by opening the inner frame 12, in particular, unauthorized modification performed on the main control device 110, for example, attaching a so-called “hanging board”, or the main control device 110 itself. Illustrates illegal acts such as replacing the board with an illegal board, illegal acts on the game board 13 by opening the front frame 14, for example, illegal nail bending, and maintenance of a game ball in a highly profitable winning opening. Is done.

  In addition, as is apparent from FIG. 28B, the pachinko machine 10 emits light emitted from each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. The mode of notification according to is a mode of notification that is repeatedly changed in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance every 1 s except for the light-off state. In this way, by making the mode of notification by light emission to be a smooth change step by step, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to notice the change in the light emission mode, and the change in the light emission mode has been closed. It can be made hard to grasp that it is information which shows that frame 12 or front frame 14 was an open state before. On the other hand, a store clerk or the like who knows in advance that the change in the light emission mode is a notification indicating that the closed inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been opened before, for example, changes in the light emission mode. By this, it can be easily grasped that the closed inner frame 12 or front frame 14 was in the open state before.

  As is clear from FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), the pachinko machine 10 is configured to display each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. The notification mode by light emission performed by the lamp 34 is a notification mode in which the maximum illuminance and the extinction are repeated every 1 s (referred to as a flashing notification mode). On the other hand, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the notification mode by the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is changed every 1 s except for the light-off state. It is set as the aspect of alerting | reporting changed repeatedly in order of maximum illumination intensity-> 2nd illumination intensity-> 3rd illumination intensity-> 2nd illumination intensity-> maximum illumination intensity. Therefore, the mode of notification by light emission when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the mode of notification by light emission when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed are clear. The light emission modes are different from each other. Therefore, it is possible to clearly distinguish and report whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in an open state or whether the closed inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been in an open state before.

  Next, processing performed by the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. For convenience of explanation, the external interrupt process of FIG. 31 will be described first, and then the main process of FIG. 29 will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114, and is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When this external interrupt process is executed, the received command is determined by the processes of S2201 and S2202.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the received command is a frame open command (S2201), and if it is determined that the received command is a frame open command (S2201: Yes), the inner frame 12 or Since it indicates that at least one of the front frames 14 has been opened, the frame open flag 233a is turned on (S2203), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  If it is determined by the process of S2201 that the received command is not a frame open command (S2201: No), it is determined whether the received command is a frame close command (S2202). Here, when it is determined that the received command is a frame closing command (S2202: Yes), it indicates that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, so the frame opening flag 233a is turned off. (S2204), the external interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S2202 that the received command is not a frame closing command (S2202: No), the process corresponding to the other received command is executed (S2205), and the external interrupt process is performed. finish. Note that as the processing executed in S2205, for example, if the received command is an effect permission command, an effect permission flag (not shown) in the work RAM 233 is turned on. If the received command is a variation pattern command, a variation start flag (not shown) in the work RAM 233 is turned on. Further, if the received command is a stop command, a process for stopping the fluctuation performed in the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114, and this main process is started when the power is turned on. First, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, processing for initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Thereafter, the compressed character information stored in a character information memory (not shown) in the character ROM 235 is read (S2002), the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is converted into the character information in the video RAM 234. Store in a storage area (not shown) (S2003). Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the character information storage area and written into a display storage area (not shown) in the video RAM 234 (S2004).

  Next, it is determined whether or not an effect permission flag (not shown) in the work RAM 233 is turned on in order to determine whether or not an effect permission command transmitted from the main control device 110 has been received (S2005). If the permission flag is not on (S2005: No), the processing after S2006 is waited until the effect permission flag is turned on.

  As a result of the process of S2005, if the production permission flag is turned on (S2005: Yes), it is determined whether or not a big hit is made (S2006). If not a big hit (S2006: No), the work RAM 233 It is determined whether or not a fluctuation start flag (not shown) is turned on (S2007). As a result, if the fluctuation start flag is turned on (S2007: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off to make it possible to determine that the fluctuation has already been started in the processing of S2007 after one cycle (S2008). Then, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern command is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S2009).

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2007, when the change start flag is off (S2007: No), or when the change starts in the process of S2009, a change effect process is performed (S2010). In the variation effect process, when the variable display is continuously performed, the character information and the effect pattern information are updated and set (new extraction of character information from the character information storage area in the video RAM 234, and the video RAM 234). When the variable display is not performed, the process proceeds to the frame release notification execution process (S2011) described later with reference to FIG. .

  After the processing of S2011, in order to execute the processing (S2006 to S2010, S2013) for performing the effect in the third symbol display device 81 every 20 ms, it is confirmed whether or not 20 ms or more have elapsed since the processing of S2006 was started. (S2012). As a result of checking in the processing of S2012, if 20 ms has not yet elapsed, the process waits until 20 ms or longer (S2012: No), and if 20 ms or longer has elapsed (S2012: Yes), the processing is performed in S2006. Transition to processing.

  If the result of the process in S2006 is a big hit (S2006: Yes), a big hit effect process is executed (S2013). In the jackpot effect process, the number of rounds is updated, the number of winning balls is updated, background images and the like that are different for each round are updated (new extraction of character information from the character information storage area in the video RAM 234, video The extracted character information is written into the display storage area in the RAM 234). After the big hit effect process (S2013) ends, the process shifts to a frame release notification execution process (S2011).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the frame opening notification execution process (S2011) described above will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a frame opening notification execution process (S2011) executed in the main process (see FIG. 29).

  As shown in FIG. 30, in this frame release notification execution process (S2011), it is first determined whether or not the frame release flag 233a is on (S2101). If the frame opening flag 233a is turned on by the processing of S2101, that is, if at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened (S2101: Yes), the 3rd symbol display device 81 indicates that “the frame is open. Is displayed "(S2102), and the process proceeds to S2101.

  On the other hand, when the frame opening flag 233a is turned off by the process of S2101, that is, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed (S2101: No), the frame closing process is executed (S2103), The frame opening notification execution process (S2011) ends. This frame closing process (S2103) is performed when the game in the main control device 110 that has been temporarily stopped by opening at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is restored. 114 is a process for returning the control at 114. If the game is not stopped, the frame closing process (S2103) is omitted.

  Therefore, according to this frame release notification execution process (S2011), when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the third symbol display device 81 is continuously in the open period. “Frame is open” is displayed (notified). Note that such notification using the third symbol display device 81 may be intermittent notification (display) similarly to the voice notification from the voice output device 226.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 is for a predetermined period of 30 seconds after the closing. The display lamp 34 notifies by light emission. Therefore, even if at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, for example, cheating is performed, and then the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed within a short time, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed. It can be notified by light emission that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been previously opened for 30 s from the closing. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, notification by blinking performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, that is, notification indicating opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is performed by the inner frame 12 or It is executed when any one of the front frames 14 is opened, but in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. The notification to change, that is, the notification indicating the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is not executed unless both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. Therefore, the notification indicating the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be executed only when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are reliably closed.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine of the second embodiment partially changes the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and performs a process at the time of frame closing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment ( 26) and a frame closing notification process (see FIG. 27) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is changed.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is obtained by adding a time counter 223h after closing the frame to the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Except for this addition, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment and the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are the same. Therefore, in the block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 32, the same parts as those in the block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Omitted and only different parts will be described.

  The time counter 223h after closing the frame is a counter that measures the elapsed time since the closing when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. The time counter 223h after closing the frame is a predetermined time (1 ms in this embodiment) that is an execution interval of the frame closing process (see FIG. 33) executed when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. ) Is incremented by 1 every time. Then, after the frame closing time counter 223h, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and 30s, which is a predetermined period, has elapsed, the execution of the frame closing process (see FIG. 33) is completed. Cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the frame closing process executed by the MPU 221 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a frame closing process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

  The frame closing process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 (MPU 221) of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 33 is performed by the sound lamp control device 113 (MPU 221) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The processing of S1706 to S1708 is added to the frame closing processing (see FIG. 26) to be executed. Except for this addition, the frame closing process (see FIG. 33) of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is the same as the frame closing process (see FIG. 26) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. . Therefore, in the frame closing process of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 33, the same parts as those in the frame closing process of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. The description thereof will be omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  In the frame closing process executed by the MPU 221 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, first, 1 is added to the time counter 223h after the frame is closed (S1706), and the time counter after the frame is closed. It is determined whether or not the value of 223h is 2000 or more, that is, whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed and 2s or more have passed since the closing (after the start of the frame closing process). (S1707). Here, since the frame state corresponding process (S1110) in which the frame closing process (S1404) is provided is executed every 1 ms (see FIG. 20), if the value of the time counter 223h after the frame is 2000 or more This indicates that 2 s or more have elapsed since the execution of the frame closing process.

  If the value of the time counter 223h after closing the frame has not yet reached 2000 by the processing of S1706 (S1707: No), the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227. A voltage of zero volt is output to the terminal and the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, a voltage of zero volt is output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1708). Thereby, the voltage applied to each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 becomes zero volts, and the red lighting of each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is not performed and is turned off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 223h after closing the frame is 2000 or more by the processing of S1706 (S1707: Yes), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and from that closing (the processing at the time of closing the frame is executed). Since 2 s or more have passed since the start, frame closing notification processing for notifying one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been opened for the next 30 s, etc. ( S1701 to S1705) are executed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, even when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the frame closing notification process (S1703) is not immediately executed, but the closing is started. After 2 seconds elapses, the frame closing notification process (S1703) is executed. Thus, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine, the store clerk normally opens the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 in order to remove the malfunction, and then closes the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. (When both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), the notification by light emission may be temporarily interrupted for 2 seconds after both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. it can. When the notification by the light emission is temporarily interrupted, the store clerk who closed the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (the store clerk who closed both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14) It can be recognized that both the frame 12 and the front frame 14 are securely closed.

  In addition, as said malfunction, for example, the malfunction of the operation of a pachinko machine (for example, payout of a prize ball or the launch of a game medium) during a game, the malfunction of an accessory placed on the game board 13, or the game board For example, problems such as a clogged game ball flowing down 13 are exemplified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a frame closing notification process executed by the MPU 221 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a frame closing notification process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

  The frame closing notification process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 (MPU 221) of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 34 is performed by the sound lamp control device 113 (MPU 221) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The process of S1810 is added to the executed frame closing notification process (see FIG. 27). Except for this addition, the frame closing notification process (see FIG. 34) of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is the same as the frame closing notification process (see FIG. 27) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. . Therefore, in the frame closing notification process of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 34, the same number is attached to the same part as the frame closing notification process of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described in FIG. The description thereof will be omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  In the frame closing notification process executed by the MPU 221 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 30 ( S1801). When the execution of the frame closing notification process (S1703) is started, the frame closing notification frequency counter 223e is incremented by 1 every 1 s (see S1705 in FIG. 33), so that the value of the frame closing notification frequency counter 223e is 30. If there is, it indicates that 30 s, which is a predetermined period, has elapsed since the start of the frame closing notification process (S1703).

  If it is not determined in step S1801 that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 30 (S1801: No), the predetermined period of 30s has not elapsed since the start of the frame closing notification processing (S1703). Therefore, the process proceeds to S1802 and subsequent processes in which notification is performed by light emission of each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1801 that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 30 (S1801: Yes), 30 s, which is a predetermined period, has elapsed since the start of the frame closing notification processing (S1703). Therefore, the process proceeds to S1807 and subsequent processes, which are processes for ending the notification by the light emission of each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34.

  In the process of S1807, the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, a voltage of zero volts is output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227, and the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off. That is, a voltage of zero volts is output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1808). Thereby, the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is turned off (see FIG. 7).

  Thereafter, the frame closing notification flag 223d, which is a flag for executing the frame closing process (see FIG. 33), is turned off (S1808), the value of the time counter 223h after the frame closing is cleared to 0 (S1810), and the frame is returned to the closed state. Processing is executed (S1809). After the frame closing return processing (S1809), the frame closing notification processing is terminated.

  As described above, the frame closing notification number counter 223e emits red light emitted by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 after 30s, which is a predetermined period, has elapsed since the start of the frame closing notification process (S1703). When it is turned off, 0 is cleared accordingly. Therefore, when the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is closed next time (when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), the elapsed time from the closing is correctly counted. be able to.

  The present invention has been described based on one embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the maximum illuminance in the notification indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, that is, the notification by blinking performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, and the inner frame 12 That indicates the closing of both the front frame 14 and the front frame 14 for a predetermined period, that is, changes in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. The maximum illuminance in the notification to be performed is the same illuminance (see FIGS. 28A and 28B), but is not limited thereto. That is, the maximum illuminance performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 → the second illuminance → the third illuminance → the second than the maximum illuminance in the flashing notification performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. The maximum illuminance in the notification that changes in the order of illuminance → maximum illuminance may be increased. In this case, it is possible to make the notification indicating the closing of both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 for a predetermined period more conspicuous than the notification indicating the opening of at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize and notify that the closed inner frame 12 or front frame 14 has been in an open state before.

  Contrary to the above, the maximum illuminance in the notification that changes in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, You may make the maximum illumination intensity in alerting | reporting by the blink performed by each electrical decoration parts 29-33 and the display lamp 34 high.

  In the pachinko machine in each embodiment, a notification indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, that is, a light emitting device that performs notification by blinking, and closing of both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are indicated for a predetermined period. The same light emitting device (each illumination unit 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) is used for notification, that is, notification that changes in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance. However, this is not a limitation. In other words, the light emitting device that performs notification by blinking is, for example, the illumination unit 30 and the illumination unit 32, while performing notification that changes in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance. The light emitting device may be, for example, the electric decoration unit 29, the electric decoration unit 31, the electric decoration unit 33, and the display lamp 34. In this case, different light-emitting devices are used for the light-emitting device that performs notification by blinking and the light-emitting device that performs notification that changes in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance. Therefore, the notification indicating the opening of at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 and the notification indicating the closing of both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 for a predetermined period are clearly different light emission modes. Therefore, it is possible to clearly distinguish and report whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in an open state or whether the closed inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been in an open state before.

  In the pachinko machine in each embodiment, as a notification indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, notification is performed by blinking performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. As a notification indicating the predetermined period, a notification was made to change in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. It is not limited. That is, a notification indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in an open state and a notification indicating that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in a closed state are used for the same light emission. It is good also as an aspect. Specifically, both a notification indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in an open state and a notification indicating that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in a closed state are both provided. Both may be notified by flashing performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, or both of them are the maximum illuminance performed by the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 → second illuminance → third. The notification may be changed in the order of illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine in each embodiment, both the notification indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 and the notification indicating the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 for a predetermined period, Although the light emission is performed by the display lamp 34, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, instead of light emission by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, an electronic sound output from the audio output device 226 is used to notify that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the inner frame 12. In addition, notification indicating the closing of the front frame 14 for a predetermined period may be performed. In this configuration, a notification indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in an open state and a notification indicating that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in a closed state are provided for a predetermined period. Both of them may be notified by the same electronic sound, notification indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in an open state, and both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. The notification indicating that it is a predetermined period may be notified by separate electronic sounds. In addition, notification indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is performed using an electronic sound output from the audio output device 226, and notification indicating the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 for a predetermined period is performed. You may perform using the decoration parts 29-33 and the display lamp 34. FIG. Contrary to this, the notification indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is performed by using each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, and the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is indicated for a predetermined period. The notification may be performed using an electronic sound output from the audio output device 226.

  In the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the state (ON / OFF) of the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 is input to the main controller 110. However, the states of these switches SW1 and SW2 are Directly to a control device (sound lamp control device 113 or display control device 114) that controls a device that enables notification to the outside (for example, sound output device 226, lamp display device 227, third symbol display device 81, etc.). It is good also as a structure made to input.

  In addition, when inputting the state (ON / OFF) of the switches SW1 and SW2 to a device that enables notification to the outside, the external output terminal plate 261 is connected to the control device (for example, the switches SW1 and SW2). When the state is input to the sound lamp control device 113, it is configured to connect to the sound lamp control device 113), and a signal indicating that the frame is being opened is externally transmitted from this connection destination control device (such as the sound lamp control device 113). You may make it output to the output terminal board 261. FIG.

  Further, in the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the MPU 201 detects the state of the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2, and when one of the opening is detected, the MPU 201 controls the frame open signal to be externally transmitted. When output to the output terminal board 261 is configured, but the state of the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 is detected by hardware by a frame detection circuit configured by an electronic circuit, and either one of the openings is detected Further, the frame detection circuit may output a frame open signal to the external output terminal plate 261.

  In the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 are turned off when the frame (the inner frame 12, the front frame 14) is closed, and the frame (the inner frame 12, the front frame 14). Although the switch having a structure that is turned on when the frame is opened is used, the switch is not limited to the switch having the structure as long as the opening / closing of the frame can be detected. For example, when the frame (inner frame 12, front frame 14) is closed and the frame (inner frame 12, front frame 14) is opened, such as a button-type switch that is turned on by pressing. A switch having a structure to be turned off may be used. Or you may utilize the sensor which can detect opening and closing of a frame, such as an optical sensor.

  Further, in the pachinko machine in each embodiment, when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, one frame opening command is output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the inner frame The frame closing command 1 is output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when both the front panel 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 is made aware that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened, triggered by reception of the frame opening command and the frame closing command.

  In place of this, when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, output of a frame opening command from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is started, and the inner frame 12 or The frame opening command is continuously output while at least one of the front frame 14 is opened, and the output of the frame opening command is stopped when the frame is closed. The sound lamp device 113 may be configured to recognize that at least one of the frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the frame opening command which is a common command is used when the inner frame 12 is opened and when the front frame 14 is opened, but this is not a limitation. The inner frame release command may be used when the inner frame 12 is opened, and the front frame opening command may be used when the front frame 14 is opened. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the manner of notification by blinking performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 depending on whether the inner frame opening command is received or the front frame opening command is received. You may comprise as follows. In this case, it is possible to distinguish and notify whether the inner frame 12 is opened or the front frame 14 is opened by blinking performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. .

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the frame closing command which is a common command is used when the opened inner frame 12 is closed and when the opened front frame 14 is closed. The inner frame closing command may be used when the inner frame 12 is closed, and the front frame closing command may be used when the front frame 14 is closed. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the illuminance of light emitted by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 when the inner frame closing command is received and when the front frame closing command is received. You may comprise so that the aspect of may be changed. In this case, whether the inner frame 12 has been opened or the front frame 14 has been opened before closing due to a change in illuminance of light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. , And can be notified separately.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the control device (sound lamp control device 113) on the side that receives a command (such as a frame open command or a frame close command) from the main control device 110 includes the lighting units 29 to 33 and Although it was set as the structure which performs the control which changes the mode of the alerting | reporting by light emission performed with the display lamp 34, the main controller 110 which detected the opening and closing of a frame (the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14) is each lighting part 29-33 and display. The configuration may be such that control for changing the mode of notification by light emission performed by the lamp 34 is performed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 emits light for 2 seconds after both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, for example, between 1 s and 3 s, the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamps 34 The light may be turned off without emitting light.

  In the pachinko machine in each embodiment, in the frame opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 14), when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open (that is, when the frame open flag 203a is on). ) Return from the game stop process (S506) to S501, and the processes of S501 to S508 are looped until it is detected that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. Instead, after the processing of S503 or S508, without performing the processing of S505, S506, or S509, when the frame open signal or the opened frame (inner frame 12 or front frame 14) is closed A configuration may be adopted in which processing for outputting an output return signal or the like to the external output terminal board 261 is performed, and the frame opening / closing monitoring processing is terminated (that is, the frame opening / closing monitoring processing is not looped).

  In the above-described embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display instruction to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114 so that a command instructing the output of each audio and the lighting of the lamp is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  The slot machine has an outer shape formed by a substantially box-shaped housing (main body) in which a rotating drum and the like are installed inside, and a front door (door body) that opens and closes the front surface of the housing. Inside the slot machine, a main control device that performs main control of the game is installed, and medals to be given to the player are stored. Therefore, in the slot machine, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 illustrated in the above embodiment, when the opened front door is closed, the light emitting device provided in the slot machine for a predetermined period of 30 seconds from the closing. If the front door is opened, for example, an illegal act is performed, and then the opened front door is closed within a short period of time. It can be notified by light emission that the front door has been opened before for 30 seconds from its closing. As a result, for example, it is possible to easily find fraudulent acts performed on the slot machine. Note that fraudulent acts performed on the slot machine (illegal acts due to unauthorized opening of the front door) include, for example, replacement of a control device (main control device, payout control device, etc.) and a medal that becomes a player's game value Illustrate fraudulent acts such as theft of

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above are shown.

  A main body, a door body for opening and closing the front surface of the main body, a door opening detection means for detecting the opening when the door body is opened with respect to the main body, and the door opening detection means opening the door body In a gaming machine provided with a notification unit that performs notification when a notification is detected, a first notification mode setting unit that sets a first notification mode indicating a mode of notification performed by the notification unit, and the door opening detection unit First opening means for causing the notifying means to perform notification in the first notifying mode set by the first notifying mode setting means during the opening period of the door body when the opening of the door is detected by And a second notification mode setting unit that sets a second notification mode indicating a mode of notification performed by the notification unit, and when the door opening detection unit detects the closing of the door body in which the opening is detected. After closing the door Gaming machine 1, characterized in that a second executing means for executing a predetermined period, the notification of the second notification manner set by the second notification manner setting means to the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, when the door is opened and the opening is detected by the door opening detection means, the first execution means is set by the first notification mode setting means during the opening period of the door body. The notification in the first notification mode is executed by the notification means. Then, when the opened door body is closed and the closure is detected by the door opening detection means, the second execution means is set by the second notification mode setting means during a predetermined period after the door body is closed. The notification means performs the notification in the second notification mode. Thus, even when the opened door is closed, the second execution unit causes the notification unit to perform notification during the predetermined period. Therefore, even if the door is opened, for example, an illegal act is performed on the gaming machine, and then the opened door is closed within a short time, the closed door is previously opened. It can be notified during a predetermined period that there has been. Therefore, for example, it is possible to facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts performed on gaming machines. The notification mode by the notification unit in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit and the notification mode by the notification unit in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit The same configuration or different configurations may be used.

  In the gaming machine 1, the notification mode by the notification unit in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit and the notification in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit. A gaming machine 2 having a different configuration from the mode of notification by means.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the notification mode by the notification unit in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit and the notification unit in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit. Since the configuration differs from the notification mode, the notification performed by the notification means when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body and the door opening detection means when the door opening detection is detected. This is different from the notification performed by the notification means. Therefore, whether the door body is in an open state or whether the closed door body was in an open state before can be clearly distinguished and notified.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the second execution means is timed by a second time measuring means for measuring an elapsed time since the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, and the second time measuring means. Execution prohibiting means for prohibiting the notification to be executed by the notification means until the elapsed time exceeds a predetermined period, and when the elapsed time measured by the second timing means has passed a predetermined period, 3. A gaming machine 3 comprising: prohibition canceling means for canceling prohibition by the execution prohibiting means.

  According to the gaming machine 3, the elapsed time measured by the second timing means, that is, the elapsed time after the door closing detection is detected by the door opening detection means, until a predetermined period elapses. The execution prohibiting unit prohibits the notification to be executed by the notification unit. Thereafter, when the elapsed time since the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body passes a predetermined period, the prohibition release means releases the prohibition by the execution prohibition means. Thus, even if the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body, the notification is prohibited until the elapsed time since the detection has passed a predetermined period. Therefore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in a gaming machine and the door body is normally opened to remove the malfunction, and then the opened door body is closed, the door body Since the prohibition of notification is temporarily performed during a predetermined period after the closing of the door, the person who closed the opened door body (for example, a store clerk) recognizes that the door body has been securely closed. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the notification means includes light emission notification means for performing notification by light emission when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, and the second notification mode setting means. The first time measuring means for measuring the elapsed time after the door opening detection is detected by the door opening detection means, and the light emission by the light emission notifying means according to the elapsed time measured by the first time measuring means. The gaming machine 4 further comprises illuminance setting means for setting a light emission mode in which the illuminance changes as the second notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine 4, the illuminance setting means sets the light emission mode in which the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification means changes according to the elapsed time counted by the first time measuring means as the second notification mode. Therefore, when the opened door body is closed and the closure is detected by the door opening detection means, the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification means is changed according to the elapsed time during a predetermined period, so that the light emission mode Can be changed smoothly. In this way, since the illuminance of the light emission changes smoothly according to the elapsed time, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to notice the change in the light emission mode, and the change in the light emission mode is caused by the closed door body. It can be made hard to grasp that it is information which shows that it was an open state before. On the other hand, for example, a game shop clerk who knows in advance that the change in the light emission mode is a notification indicating that the closed door body was previously open, It can be easily grasped that the closed door body was in the open state before.

  In the gaming machine 4, the first notification mode setting unit includes a blinking setting unit that sets a light emission mode in which light emitted by the light emission notification unit blinks as the first notification mode, and the illuminance setting unit includes the first illuminance setting unit, Limiting illuminance setting for setting, as the second notification mode, a light emission mode in which the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification unit, which changes according to the elapsed time measured by the one clocking unit, exceeds the predetermined illuminance A gaming machine 5 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the blink setting unit sets the light emission mode in which the light emission by the light emission notification unit blinks as the first notification mode. Thus, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the light emission by the light emission notification means is repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the limited illuminance setting means emits light from the light emission notifying means according to the elapsed time measured by the first time measuring means, that is, according to the elapsed time after the door opening detection is detected by the door opening detecting means. The light emission mode in which the illuminance changes at a level exceeding the predetermined illuminance is set as the second notification mode. Thereby, when the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body, the light emission by the light emission notification means does not turn off during a predetermined period, and changes with an illuminance exceeding a predetermined illuminance. Thus, the light emitted by the light emission notification means is repeatedly turned on and off when the door opening detection means detects the door opening, while the door opening detection means detects the door closing. In this case, the light intensity does not turn off and changes with illuminance exceeding a predetermined illuminance. Therefore, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the light emission notification means performs the light emission notification means, and when the door opening detection means detects the door body closure, the light emission notification means performs the light emission. The notification by means of a light emission mode that is clearly different. Therefore, it is possible to clearly distinguish and notify whether the door body is in an open state or whether the closed door body has been in an open state before.

  In the gaming machine 4 or 5, the first notification mode setting unit sets at least a maximum illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification unit in the first notification mode as the first notification mode, and the second notification mode. The setting unit sets at least the maximum illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification unit in the second notification mode as the second notification mode, and the light emission set by the second notification mode setting unit as the second notification mode. The maximum illuminance of light emission by the notification means is set to be higher than the maximum illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification means set as the first notification mode by the first notification mode setting means. 6.

  According to the gaming machine 6, the maximum illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification unit set by the second notification mode setting unit as the second notification mode is the light emission by the light emission notification unit set by the first notification mode setting unit as the first notification mode. The illuminance is set higher than the maximum illuminance. Thereby, when the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body, the light emission notification means, rather than the maximum illuminance of light emission performed by the light emission notification means when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body. The maximum illuminance of the emitted light is higher. Therefore, the light emission performed by the light emission notification means is more conspicuous when the door opening detection means detects the closing of the opened door body than when the door opening detection means detects the door opening. be able to. Therefore, it can be emphasized and notified that the closed door body was an open state before.

  In any of the gaming machines 4 to 6, the door body includes an inner frame that is opened and closed with respect to the main body, and a transparent plate support door that is opened and closed with respect to the inner frame, and the light emitting device. The notification means is arranged at a plurality of locations on the front surface of the transparent plate support door, and is configured to be able to execute the notification by the light emission independently at each of the plurality of locations, the first execution means and The second execution means combines the light emission notification means disposed at the plurality of locations, and causes the combined light emission notification means to execute the notification by the light emission, and the first execution means causes the light emission by the light emission. The combination of the light emission notification means for executing the notification and the combination of the light emission notification means for executing the notification by the light emission by the second execution means have different configurations. Tricks machine 7.

  According to the gaming machine 7, the light emission notification means is disposed at a plurality of locations on the front surface of the transparent plate support door that is opened and closed with respect to the inner frame, and light emission is independently performed at each of the disposed plurality of locations. The notification is configured to be executable. And a 1st execution means and a 2nd execution means combine the light emission alerting | reporting means arrange | positioned in several places, respectively, and perform alerting | reporting by light emission by the combined light emission alerting | reporting means, respectively. Here, the combination of the light emission notification unit that causes the first execution unit to execute the notification by the light emission and the combination of the light emission notification unit that causes the second execution unit to execute the notification by the light emission have different configurations. Therefore, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the light emission notification means performs the light emission notification means, and when the door opening detection means detects the door body closure, the light emission notification means performs the light emission. The notification by means of a light emission mode that is clearly different. Therefore, it is possible to clearly distinguish and notify whether the door body is in an open state or whether the closed door body has been in an open state before.

  In any one of the gaming machines 4 to 7, the door body includes an inner frame that is opened and closed with respect to the main body, and a transparent plate support door that is opened and closed with respect to the inner frame. The opening detection means is provided on each of the inner frame and the transparent plate support door, and the first execution means detects the opening of at least one of the inner frame or the transparent plate support door by the door opening detection means. In the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit, the light emission notification unit causes the light emission notification unit to execute the second emission unit. When the closing of both the inner frame and the transparent plate support door is detected, the light emission notification unit is caused to execute the notification by the light emission in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit. Characterized by Tricks machine 8.

  According to the gaming machine 8, the first execution means sets the first notification set by the first notification mode setting means when the opening of at least one of the inner frame or the transparent plate support door is detected by the door opening detection means. In an aspect, the light emission notification means is caused to execute notification by light emission. On the other hand, the second execution unit is a second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit when the closing of both the inner frame and the transparent plate support door is detected by the door opening detection unit. To perform notification by light emission. Therefore, the notification by the light emission in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit is sent to the light emission notification unit even when either the inner frame or the transparent plate support door is opened. On the other hand, the notification by the light emission in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting means is performed when the inner frame and the transparent plate support door are both securely closed. This can be executed by the notification means.

  Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 8, further comprising a control means disposed on the back side of the door body for controlling the game.

  According to the gaming machine 9, since the control means (control device) for controlling the game is arranged on the back side of the door body, that is, on the back side of the door body, the control means (control) by unauthorized opening of the door body. Unauthorized acts on the device can be reliably prevented.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 Outer frame (main body)
12 Inner frame (part of door)
14 Front frame (part of door)
29-33 Illumination part (part of notification means, part of light emission notification means)
34 Display lamp (part of the notification means, part of the light emission notification means)
221 MPU (part of first execution means, part of second execution means)
223b Frame opening notification number counter (part of the first notification mode setting means)
223c Frame opening notification time counter (part of the first notification mode setting means)
223e Frame closing notification number counter (part of the second notification mode setting means, part of the first timing means)
223f Frame closing notification time counter (part of the second notification mode setting means, part of the first time measurement means)
223h Time counter after closing the frame (second time measuring means)
S1402 Processing when opening frame (part of first execution means)
S1404 Frame closing process (part of second execution means)
S1503 Frame opening notification process (part of the first notification mode setting means)
S1602 Frame release notification process (flashing setting means)
S1603 Frame open notification process (flashing setting means)
S1703 Frame closing notification processing (part of second notification mode setting means, part of illuminance setting means)
S1707: Yes frame closing process (prohibition canceling means)
S1707: No frame closing process (execution prohibition means)
S1803 Frame closing notification process (restricted illuminance setting means)
S1805 Frame closing notification process (restricted illuminance setting means)
S1806 Frame closing notification process (restricted illuminance setting means)
SW1 Inner frame switch (part of door opening detection means)
SW2 Front frame switch (part of door opening detection means)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is generally configured to be provided with a door body that can be opened and closed on the front side of the gaming machine body, and to be able to open the front side of the gaming machine body (for example, Patent Documents). 1).

In a pachinko machine that is a type of gaming machine, for example, a gaming board is mounted from the back side of the inner frame, and the gaming area of the gaming board can be exposed by opening the glass door. Therefore, if a malfunction occurs in the game area during the game (for example, a malfunction of an accessory placed in the game area or a ball clogging of a game ball flowing down in the game area), the hall attendant makes a glass The door is opened to solve the problem.

On the other hand, for example, a control device for controlling the game is attached to the back side of the game board, and when the inner frame is closed with respect to the gaming machine body, the control device is , for example, the inner frame. is the storage on the back side or the like. If a malfunction occurs in the operation of the gaming machine during the game (for example, a prize ball is not paid out or a game ball is not fired), an inner frame is opened by a hall attendant, and a control device check (for example, Wiring and electrical contact checks) are performed.

By the way, in a pachinko machine which is a kind of gaming machine, for example, when a lottery is performed at a predetermined timing and a predetermined result (for example , a win) is obtained by the lottery , a game medium (game ball or coin) is paid out. It becomes possible. Such lottery, the control unit (e.g., main controller) because it is controlled by, unduly generate an equivalent or, for the purpose of illegally paid out game media, such control device is tampered with by the fraudster There are many cases that occur. As specific examples of unauthorized modification, for example, an unauthorized substrate (for example, a “hanging substrate”) is attached to the control device, the control device itself is replaced with an unauthorized substrate, or the CPU of the control device is unauthorized. For example, the CPU may be replaced with a new CPU. Therefore, the inner frame may be opened illegally for the purpose of fraudulent acts by the fraudster.

In addition, for example, an illegal acter may be advantageous to win a game ball in a winning opening that triggers a lottery by illegally bending a ball guide nail installed in a game area (so-called nail bending goto ), And sometimes illegal actions such as direct insertion of a game ball by hand into a highly profitable winning opening (for example, a specific winning opening). Therefore, the glass door may also be opened illegally.
Since the inner frame and the glass door can often be opened improperly as described above, for example, when the opening of the inner frame or the glass door is detected, the lamp is turned on or the sound is output during the opening period. A gaming machine that notifies the outside that the inner frame or the glass door has been opened and prevents unauthorized opening has been proposed.

JP 2007-111100 A

However, when the inner frame or the glass door is opened, for example, in a gaming machine that notifies only during the opening period, for example, the fraudulent act by the fraudulent person has been executed within a relatively short time. In this case, since the notification time remains relatively short, there is a problem that it is difficult to detect fraud.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of facilitating the discovery of fraud.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this object, body and a door body openable and closable with respect to the main body, and detectable door opening and closing detecting means opening and closing of the door, the door opening are those in which a notification means for performing notification if the opening of the door body is detected by closing detection means, first notification mode setting for setting a first notification manner as aspects of the notification performed by the notification means and means, when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening and closing detecting means, during the opening period of the door body, the notification of the first notification manner set by the first notification mode setting means and the detection and first executing means for executing the notification means, second notification mode setting means for setting a second notification manner as aspects of the notification performed by the notifying means, the closure of the door body by the door opening and closing detection means If the door is closed, During a second execution means for executing the notification of the second notification manner set by the second notification manner setting means to said notification means, from the detection of the closing of the door body by the door opening-closing detection means Measuring means for measuring the elapsed period of time, execution prohibiting means for prohibiting notification to be executed by the notification means until the elapsed time measured by the measuring means passes a predetermined period, and measurement by the measurement means And a prohibition canceling means for canceling the prohibition by the execution prohibiting means and starting the notification by the second executing means when the elapsed period to be passed is a predetermined period .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , for example, there is an effect that it is possible to easily find an illegal act performed on the gaming machine. The notification mode by the notification unit in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit and the notification mode by the notification unit in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit The same configuration or different configurations may be used.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state where an inner frame, a front frame, and a lower plate unit were opened. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the inner frame switch which detects opening and closing of an inner frame. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the circuit structure inside a lamp display apparatus. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed in the change process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the frame opening / closing monitoring process performed in the main process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the frame command transmission process performed in the frame opening / closing monitoring process of FIG. It is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed in the main process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the external interruption process performed with MPU provided in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the frame state corresponding | compatible process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the frame open | release performed in the frame state corresponding | compatible process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the frame open | release alerting process performed in the process at the time of the frame open of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the frame closure performed in the frame state corresponding | compatible process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the frame closing alerting | reporting process performed in the process at the time of the frame closing of FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the mode of alerting | reporting by light emission performed by each electrical decoration part and a display lamp when either one of an inner frame or a front frame is open | released and the process at the time of frame open | release is performed. Yes, (b) is a notification of light emission performed by each of the lighting units and the display lamps when both the inner frame and the front frame are closed and the frame closing process is executed for a predetermined period from the closing. It is the schematic diagram which showed the aspect. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the frame open | release notification execution process performed in the main process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the external interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the frame closing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame closure alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower plate unit 15 are opened, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing a structure of an inner frame switch SW1 that detects opening / closing of 12, a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 are omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In the game hall, the outer peripheral surface of the outer frame 11 is fixed to an installation location called an island of the game hall. Since the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower dish unit 15 are configured to be openable to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower dish unit 15 are not touched from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Inspection and adjustment are performed with the inner frame 12 and the like open to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11.

  In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of an ABS resin inner frame base 25 (see FIG. 2) formed in a rectangular shape, and a substantially circular central window 25a (see FIG. 2) is formed at the center of the inner frame base 25. 2) is formed. A game board 13 (see FIG. 4) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112 a that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112 a to the front area of the game board 13. ) Etc. are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, an inner frame switch SW1 (SW1a, SW1b) for detecting the opening and closing of the inner frame 12 is provided between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. A front frame switch SW2 (SW2a, SW2b) for detecting opening and closing of the front frame 14 is provided between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. The inner frame switch SW1 includes a female switch SW1a disposed on a surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12, and an insulating member disposed on a surface of the inner frame 12 facing the outer frame 11. And a male switch SW1b. The front frame switch SW2 includes a female switch SW2a disposed on the surface of the inner frame 12 facing the front frame 14, and a male switch SW2b disposed on the surface of the front frame 14 facing the inner frame 12. It consists of.

  Here, the structure of the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 have the same structure, the structure of the inner frame switch SW1 will be described, and the description of the front frame switch SW2 will be omitted. FIG. 3A is a schematic diagram showing the state of the inner frame switch SW1 when the inner frame 12 is closed (off state, cutoff state). FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram showing the state (ON state, conduction state) of the inner frame switch SW1 when the inner frame 12 is opened.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, the female switch SW1a disposed on the surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12 incorporates a pair of terminal pairs SW1c made of metal as a conductive member. ing.

  Here, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the female switch SW1a disposed on the surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12 is arranged on the surface of the inner frame 12 facing the outer frame 11. The provided male switch SW1b is inserted. The male switch SW1b inserted in the female switch SW1a is inserted between the terminal pair SW1c to prevent contact between the terminal pairs SW1c. Thus, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the contact between the terminal pairs SW1c is hindered by the insulating male switch SW1b, so the inner frame switch SW1 is turned off (conduction is cut off). It becomes a state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the male switch SW <b> 1 b disposed on the surface of the inner frame 12 facing the outer frame 11 is connected to the outer frame 11. It is pulled out from the female switch SW1a disposed on the surface facing the inner frame 12. Since the terminal pair SW1c in the female switch SW1a has a structure in which an urging force is generated in a direction facing each other, the terminal pair SW1c is in contact with each other when the male switch SW1b is pulled out from the female switch SW1a. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the inner frame switch SW1 is turned on (conducted).

  Thus, the inner frame switch SW1 is turned off when the inner frame 12 is closed (becomes a shut-off state), and is turned on when the inner frame 12 is opened (becomes a conductive state). ). The structure of the inner frame switch SW1 is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 3, and the inner frame switch SW1 is turned off when the inner frame 12 is closed, and the inner frame switch is opened when the inner frame 12 is opened. Any structure may be used as long as the switch SW1 is turned on. The same applies to the structure of the front frame switch SW2.

  The inner frame switch SW1 only needs to be able to distinguish between a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened and a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed. That is, by using a control method different from the control method shown below (for example, the frame opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 14)), the inner frame 12 is turned on when the inner frame 12 is closed, and the inner frame 12 is opened. In this case, a switch having a structure that is turned off can be used as the inner frame switch SW1. Similarly, a switch having a structure that is turned on when the front frame 14 is closed and turned off when the front frame 14 is opened can be used as the front frame switch SW2.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. . A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or flashing of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpots or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 4) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed. Inside the operation handle 51, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6). And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window portion 14 c of the front frame 14. Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner circumference 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 surround the front and rear. A game area to be played is formed. The game area is a substantially circular area that is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (the upper left portion in FIG. 4) to prevent a situation in which the ball guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 once returns to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 4) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37b is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 4). The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being probabilistically changing, operating in a short time, or in the normal state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not in the lit state, and the stop symbol corresponding to the probable big hit Whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an out-of-game symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 being probable is a game state in which the jackpot probability is increased and it is easy to shift to the special game state. Further, during the probability change in the present embodiment, the game is in a state where the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 4). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is short-running, it is a game state in which it is easy for a ball to easily enter the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 4) with the jackpot probability remaining unchanged and only the second symbol hit probability increased. . In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased). It should be noted that, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 and the number of times the electric accessory is released per hit are changed. It is good as a thing.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance 64 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device 82 composed of a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) that variably displays the second symbol with the passage of the ball of the second entrance 67 as a trigger.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, and, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 includes a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Is arranged. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 until the stop symbol (any one of the probable jackpot symbol, the normal jackpot symbol, or the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of entered balls is held up to 4 times, and the number of held times is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the number of lights of the holding lamp 85. Four hold lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning at the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more. In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically held in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) by the frequency | count. In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not perform lighting display.

  The second symbol display device 82 includes a second symbol display unit 83 and a holding lamp 84, and each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the display unit 83 displays a display symbol (second symbol). The symbol “○” and “x” in FIG. 1 are alternately lit to display a variation, and the variation display is stopped when the variation display stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol “◯”). The entrance 64 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of passes through the second entrance 67 of the sphere is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit on the hold lamp 84. The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps on the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. You may make it carry out using a part of. Similarly, the hold lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, and is not limited to 4 times, or 3 times or less (for example, (8 times). In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a and a large opening opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (FIG. 6)). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. Can be visually recognized through the small window 35.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 and a second entrance (through gate) 67. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 5, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 has a frame opening flag 203a, a frame opening command transmission flag 203b, and a frame closing command transmission flag 203c. The frame release flag 203a is a flag indicating whether or not at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is open (that is, whether both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open). . The frame opening flag 203a is turned on when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, that is, when at least one of the inner frame switch SW1 or the front frame switch SW2 is turned on (conductive). The On the other hand, the frame opening flag 203a is turned off when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, that is, when both the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 are turned off (shut off). . Therefore, if the frame release flag 203a is on, it indicates that at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is being opened.

  The frame opening command transmission flag 203b is a flag indicating whether or not the frame opening command is transmitted once from the MPU 201 to the sound lamp control device 113 in association with at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 being opened. is there. The frame release command transmission flag 203b is first set to “off” in the main process (see FIG. 11) of the main controller 110 described later. When at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened and the MPU 201 transmits a frame opening command once, it is set to “ON”. The frame opening command transmission flag 203b indicates that the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), and a frame closing command is sent from the MPU 201 to the sound lamp control device 113. Once transmitted, it is set to “off” again.

  The frame closing command transmission flag 203c indicates that the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), and the MPU 201 sends the frame to the sound lamp control device 113 along with the closing. It is a flag indicating whether or not the close command has been transmitted once. The frame closing command transmission flag 203c is first set to “ON” in the main process (see FIG. 11) of the main controller 110 described later. When at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened and the MPU 201 transmits a frame opening command once, it is set to “off”. The frame closing command transmission flag 203c indicates that the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), and the MPU 201 transmits a frame closing command once. , It is set to “ON” again.

  The reason why the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is first set to “ON” in the main process (see FIG. 11) of the main controller 110 will be described. For example, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is started due to a store opening preparation or the like, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are normally closed. Here, the frame closing command is a command transmitted once when the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is closed (when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed). . Therefore, if both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, it can be considered that the frame closing command has already been transmitted once by the MPU 201. Therefore, the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is first set to “ON” in the main process of the main controller 110. In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started, even if at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened (the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is not closed, the frame The frame closing command transmission flag 203c is set to “ON” even if the closing command has not been transmitted yet, but when the MPU 201 transmits a frame opening command once thereafter, the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is Normal value is set to “off”. Therefore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started, there is no problem even if at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened.

  The RAM 203 stores not only the above flags but also a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. Is provided with a work area (work area) in which the value is stored. The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 11), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 10) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a specific prize. A solenoid 209 comprising a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the opening 65a as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the like is connected.

  The inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 are connected to the input / output port 205. The on / off state of the inner frame switch SW1 and the on / off state of the front frame switch SW2 are detected by the MPU 201 by being input to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Since the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 are connected in parallel, when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the opening is detected by the MPU 201.

  An external output terminal plate 261 is connected to the input / output port 205. The external output terminal board 261 is configured so that a hall computer 262 can be connected thereto. The external output terminal board 261 receives a signal or data output from the main controller 110 (for example, a frame open signal indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open), Signals and data are relayed to the hall computer 262.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to a bus line BL1 for transmitting various commands to the sound lamp control device 113 and a bus line BL2 for transmitting a strobe signal SG3 to the sound lamp control device 113. When various commands (for example, a frame open command or a frame close command) are started to be transmitted by the MPU 201 to the sound lamp control device 113 via the bus line BL1, the MPU 201 transmits a strobe signal to the sound lamp control device 113 via the bus line BL2. SG3 is output. When the audio lamp control device 113 (MPU 221) receives the strobe signal SG3 transmitted from the MPU 201 via the bus line BL2, it starts receiving various commands transmitted from the MPU 201 via the bus line BL1.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 on the condition that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. Then, the launch solenoid is excited, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is a voice output in a voice output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and the display control device 114. The setting of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 performed etc. is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes a frame opening flag 223a, a frame opening notification count counter 223b, a frame opening notification timing counter 223c, a frame closing notification flag 223d, a frame closing notification count counter 223e, and a frame closing notification timing. It has a counter 223f and a command reception memory 223g.

  Similarly to the frame release flag 203a provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the frame release flag 223a is set to determine whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14). Is a flag indicating whether or not the file is open. If the frame opening flag 223a is on, the frame opening process for notifying by light emission that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open using the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. (See FIG. 24) is executed. The frame opening flag 223a is turned on when a frame opening command indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been opened is received from the main controller 110, while the opened inner frame 12 is opened. Alternatively, it is turned off when a frame closing command is received from the main controller 110 indicating that the front frame 14 is closed (indicating that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed).

  The frame opening notification frequency counter 223b performs the number of times of light emission notification by the frame opening process (see FIG. 24) executed during one opening when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. It is a counter which counts. This frame opening notification number counter 223b is cleared to 0 every time a frame opening command is received from the main controller 110, and is set to 1 every time the notification mode by light emission for the opening of at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is switched. Is added.

  The frame opening notification timing counter 223c is a counter that measures the switching interval (period) of the notification mode of notification by light emission executed in the frame opening processing (see FIG. 24). This frame opening notification time counter 223c is a predetermined time (this implementation) which is an execution interval of the frame opening process (see FIG. 24) executed while at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. In the embodiment, 1 is added every 1 ms). Then, when the frame opening notification time counter 223c reaches the timing of switching the notification mode by the light emission performed by the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 during the frame opening processing (see FIG. 24). Is cleared to 0. Also, the frame open notification time counter 223c is cleared to 0 when a frame open command is received.

  When the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is closed (when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), the frame closing notification flag 223d is displayed for a predetermined period (this embodiment). Then, the frame closing process (see FIG. 26) for notifying by light emission that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been previously opened is performed using the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. It is a flag for This frame closing notification flag 223d is a frame opening notification process indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened (see FIG. 24). Turns on when is done. When the frame closing notification flag 223d is turned on, when the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed (when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), the frame 12 or the front frame A frame closing process (see FIG. 26) is performed to notify that 14 has been previously opened using the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. The frame closing notification flag 223d is turned off when the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is closed and a predetermined period (30 s in this embodiment) has elapsed since the closing.

  The frame closing notification number counter 223e is a frame closing process that is executed when the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is closed (when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed) (see FIG. 26)). This frame closing notification frequency counter 223e is cleared to 0 each time a frame closing command is received from the main control device 110, and is set to 1 every time the notification mode by light emission for closing of the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is switched. Is added.

  The frame closing notification time counter 223f is a counter that measures the switching interval (period) of the notification mode of notification by light emission executed in the frame closing processing (see FIG. 26). This frame closing notification time counter 223f is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, an execution interval of frame closing processing (see FIG. 26) executed when the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is closed). 1 is added every 1 ms). Then, when the frame closing notification time counter 223f reaches the timing for switching the notification mode by the light emission performed by the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 during the frame closing processing (see FIG. 26). Is cleared to 0. The frame closing notification time counter 223f is also cleared to 0 when a frame closing command is received.

  The command reception memory 223g is a memory for storing various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 via the bus line BL1. In the command reception memory 223g, in addition to the frame opening command and the frame closing command, a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, an effect time addition command, etc. required for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, etc. Is memorized. Note that the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 decodes the command stored in the command reception memory 223g and performs control according to the decoded command.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The lamp display device 227 switches the mode of notification by light emission of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 according to whether or not the signals (voltages) input to the IN1 terminal and the IN2 terminal are on in a maximum of four stages. Device. The lamp display device 227 is constituted by a circuit that switches the illumination modes 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 and the notification mode by the light emission of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. It should be noted that the mode of notification by light emission of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 that are switched by the lamp display device 227 in a maximum of four stages indicates that the illuminance of light emission by red is switched in a maximum of four stages.

  Here, a specific configuration of the lamp display device 227 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the lamp display device 227. In FIG. 7, a circuit connected to the display lamp 34 is shown as a representative. As for the illumination parts 29 to 33, the same circuit as the circuit connected to the display lamp 34 shown in FIG. 7 is provided in the lamp display device 227, and the IN1 terminal and the IN2 terminal of each provided circuit are displayed. Similar to the lamp 34, the lamp 34 is connected to an output port serving as another address in the input / output port 225. Therefore, the illustrations of the illumination units 29 to 33 are omitted and the description thereof is omitted.

  A circuit connected to the display lamp 34 includes AND circuits AND1 to AND3, logic negation circuits NOT1 to NOT2, field effect transistors FET1 to FET3 as switching elements, resistors R1 to R7, and a DC power source DC1. Has been. Here, the resistors R1 to R6 have the same resistance value.

  Since the power supply terminals (not shown) of the DC power supply DC1, AND circuits AND1 to AND3, and NOT circuits NOT1 to NOT2 are connected to the power supply unit 251 by a power supply line (not shown), the DC power supply DC1 and the AND circuit AND1. ˜AND3 and logic negation circuits NOT1 to NOT2 are supplied with a DC voltage of 5 volts supplied from the power supply unit 251.

  The DC power source DC1 is a power source that supplies a DC voltage of 5 volts to a circuit connected to the display lamp 34, and an output terminal of the DC power source DC1 is a resistor that limits the DC current supplied together with the DC voltage from the DC power source DC1. It is connected to one end of R7. The other end of the resistor R7 is connected to each drain terminal of the field effect transistors FET1 to FET3.

  The source terminal of the field effect transistor FET1 is connected to one end of the resistor R1, and the other end of the resistor R1 is connected to the anode terminal of the display lamp 34 composed of a red light emitting diode. The cathode terminal of the display lamp 34 is grounded.

  The source terminal of the field effect transistor FET2 is connected to one end of the resistor R2, and the other end of the resistor R2 is connected to one end of the resistor R3. The other end of the resistor R3 is connected to the anode terminal of the display lamp 34 composed of a red light emitting diode.

  The source terminal of the field effect transistor FET3 is connected to one end of the resistor R4, and the other end of the resistor R4 is connected to one end of the resistor R5. The other end of the resistor R5 is connected to one end of the resistor R6, and the other end of the resistor R6 is connected to the anode terminal of the display lamp 34 composed of a red light emitting diode.

  The gate terminal of the field effect transistor FET1 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit AND1. One input terminal of the AND circuit AND1 is connected to the input / output port 225 via the IN1 terminal, and the other input terminal of the AND circuit AND1 is connected to the input / output port 225 via the IN2 terminal. It is connected.

  The gate terminal of the field effect transistor FET2 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit AND2. One input terminal of the AND circuit AND2 is connected to the input / output port 225 via the IN1 terminal, and the other input terminal of the AND circuit AND2 is connected to the output terminal of the logic NOT circuit NOT1. Yes. The input terminal of the logical NOT circuit NOT1 is connected to the input / output port 225 via the IN2 terminal.

  The gate terminal of the field effect transistor FET3 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit AND3. One input terminal of the AND circuit AND3 is connected to the output terminal of the logic NOT circuit NOT2. The input terminal of the logical NOT circuit NOT2 is connected to the input / output port 225 via the IN1 terminal. The other input terminal of the AND circuit AND3 is connected to the input / output port 225 via the IN2 terminal.

  With the above connection, the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is 5 volts, that is, ON, and the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is 5 volts, that is, If it is on, a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the output terminal of the AND circuit AND1, and the field effect transistor FET1 becomes conductive. At this time, since zero volt is output from the output terminals of the AND circuits AND2 and AND3, the field effect transistors FET2 and FET3 are cut off. Thus, if the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is on and the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is on, the field effect transistor FET1. Therefore, a DC voltage obtained by dropping the DC voltage supplied from the DC voltage DC1 by the resistor R7 and the resistor R1 is applied to the display lamp 34.

  Also, the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is 5 volts, that is, on, while the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is zero volts, that is, off. For example, a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the output terminal of the AND circuit AND2, and the field effect transistor FET2 becomes conductive. At this time, since zero volt is output from the output terminals of the AND circuits AND1 and AND3, the field effect transistors FET1 and FET3 are cut off. In this way, if the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is on, while the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is off, the field effect transistor Since the FET 2 becomes conductive, a DC voltage obtained by dropping the DC voltage supplied from the DC voltage DC1 by the resistors R7, R2 and R3 is applied to the display lamp 34.

  Further, the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is zero volts, that is, off, while the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is 5 volts, that is, ON. For example, a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the output terminal of the AND circuit AND3, and the field effect transistor FET3 becomes conductive. At this time, since zero volt is output from the output terminals of the AND circuits AND1 and AND2, the field effect transistors FET1 and FET2 are cut off. As described above, if the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is OFF, while the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is ON, the field effect transistor Since the FET 3 becomes conductive, a DC voltage obtained by dropping the DC voltage supplied from the DC voltage DC1 by the resistors R7, R4, R5, and R6 is applied to the display lamp 34.

  Finally, if the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is zero volts, that is, off, and the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is zero volts, that is, off. Since zero volts is output from the output terminals of the AND circuits AND1 to AND3, the field effect transistors FET1 to FET3 are all cut off. Thus, if the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is OFF and the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is OFF, the field effect transistor FET1. Since all of the FET3 are cut off, the DC voltage supplied from the DC voltage DC1 is not applied to the display lamp 34.

  Here, as described above, since the resistors R1 to R6 all have the same resistance value, the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is ON, and output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal. When the signal (voltage) to be applied is ON, the voltage applied to the display lamp 34 becomes the maximum value, and the illuminance (red illuminance) due to the light emission of the display lamp 34 becomes the maximum. Hereinafter, the case where the illuminance due to red light emission of the display lamp 34 (including each of the illumination units 29 to 33) becomes maximum is referred to as “maximum illuminance”.

  When the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is on, while the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is off, the display lamp 34 The voltage applied to is higher next to the maximum value (second highest), and the illuminance due to the light emitted from the display lamp 34 is next higher than the maximum illuminance (second highest). Hereinafter, a case where the illuminance due to red light emission of the display lamp 34 (including each of the illumination units 29 to 33) becomes the second highest is referred to as “second illuminance”.

  When the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is off, while the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is on, the display lamp 34 The voltage applied to the second is the second highest (third highest), and the illuminance due to the light emitted from the display lamp 34 is next higher than the second illuminance (third highest). Hereinafter, a case where the illuminance due to red light emission of the display lamp 34 (including each of the illumination units 29 to 33) becomes the third highest is referred to as “third illuminance”.

  When the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal is OFF and the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal is OFF, the display lamp 34 The applied voltage becomes zero volts, and the display lamp 34 does not emit light. Hereinafter, a case where the display lamp 34 (including each of the illumination units 29 to 33) does not emit light is referred to as “light off”.

  As described above, the circuit connected to the display lamp 34 depends on the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN1 terminal and the signal (voltage) output from the input / output port 225 to the IN2 terminal. The voltage applied to the display lamp 34 is changed in a maximum of four stages. As a result, the display lamp 34 changes the illuminance of red light emission in a maximum of four stages and performs notification by light emission.

  The display lamp 34 (including each of the lighting units 29 to 33) changes the illuminance of red light emission and performs notification by light emission, but changes the illuminance of blue or yellow light emission instead of red. Thus, notification by light emission may be performed.

  Here, as described above, for the illumination units 29 to 33, the same circuit as the circuit connected to the display lamp 34 is provided in the lamp display device 227, and the IN1 terminal and the IN2 terminal of the provided circuit, respectively. However, since each of the illumination units 29 to 33 emits light independently, the illuminance due to the light emission can also be changed independently.

  Returning to the description of FIG. The display control device 114 controls the change display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. It has.

  The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the symbol display command input from the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs, and has an inner frame release flag 233a.

  Similarly to the frame release flag 203a provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the frame release flag 233a indicates whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14). Is a flag indicating whether or not the file is open. If the frame opening flag 223a is on, it indicates that at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is being opened. The frame opening flag 223a is turned on when a frame opening command indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened is received from the sound lamp control device 113, while the opened inner frame is opened. 12 or the front frame 14 is turned off when a frame close command is received from the sound lamp controller 113 indicating that the front frame 14 is closed (indicating that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed).

  In addition, the work RAM 233 includes, as flags (not shown), an effect permission flag that indicates whether or not the effect is permitted, and a variation start flag that indicates whether or not the variable display should be started. The effect permission flag (not shown) is turned on when an effect permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is received via the sound lamp control device 113, and turned off when the power is cut off. . The variation start flag (not shown) is turned on when a command corresponding to the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation display. Is turned off when is started.

  The character ROM 235 has a character information memory (not shown) in which character information such as symbols (background symbols and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. Character information stored in the character information memory (not shown) includes numerical data of the third symbol (for example, 0 to 9) that is variably displayed, and symbol data other than the numerical data (for example, a box symbol or a helmet symbol). A design (see FIG. 7B)), a background design, a notice character design, a character design (for example, a boy (see FIG. 7B)), and the like are stored.

  In the character information memory, the character information as described above is stored as compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In this embodiment, the character information is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the character information of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character information memory. When the character information stored in the character information memory as compressed data is read out, it is decompressed and written in a character information storage area (not shown) of the video RAM 234.

  The video RAM 234 is a storage area for display (not shown) in which effect data corresponding to display contents (effect display pattern of variable display, effect contents at reach effect, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. And a character information storage area (not shown) in which data obtained by decompressing compressed character information stored in a character information memory (not shown) of the character ROM 235 is stored.

  The display storage area (not shown) stores effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By rewriting the contents of the display storage region, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are changed. Be changed. In addition, in a character information storage area (not shown), character data serving as a material such as background symbols and decorative symbols is stored, and necessary data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character information storage area. Then, it is written in a display storage area (not shown).

  The character information is stored in a character information storage area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 because the processing speed is generally higher in the RAM than in the ROM, and the character information is directly read from the character ROM 235. This is because when writing directly to a display storage area (not shown), if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read and smooth display cannot be performed or clear display cannot be performed. Furthermore, this is because it is easy to process display data in the RAM (for example, change the size of the decorative design or change the color of the background design).

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timing of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data and the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data. A payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9” and one type of sub-shaped petal shape formed smaller than this main symbol. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box almost fully, and attached symbols imitating characters such as furoshiki and helmets are added. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. It is configured as follows. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added is arranged. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are arranged. Here, the high probability state refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). Further, the normal state (low probability state) refers to a time when the probability of hitting is not probable, and refers to a state where the probability of jackpot is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that during probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. For this reason, a total of 20 third symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub-designs are set in each symbol row, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scrolls from top to bottom with periodicity. The display is changed. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. In the main display area Dm, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set. In each game, the variable display stops in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and the combination of jackpot symbols on one of the active lines at the time of the stop (in this embodiment, the same Jackpot animations are displayed as jackpots.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are usually covered with double-open opaque doors that are electrically opened and closed by solenoids (not shown), and sometimes the solenoids are excited and the doors are on the front side. It is a display area that is visible to the player when it is opened. The center notice area Ds2 is a display area that is always visible without being covered by the door.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, in the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols and sub-designs of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are covered and the display screen cannot be visually recognized. If either one of the left and right doors or both doors are opened during the variable display, a video is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and it is easy for the player to change to a big hit than usual. It is suggested. In the center notice area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds in principle, but the third symbol and characters are displayed larger across the display areas Dm and Ds. A display effect can be performed.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 11), or at an interval of 2 ms, an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Stored in the counter buffer. The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball winning timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed. It is updated once and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 11). The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in The number of random number values that are jackpots is set at low probability and high probability, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots at low probability is 2, and the value is “373, 727” There are 14 random numbers that are big hits at high probability, and the values are "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733".

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit, and in this embodiment, one by one is added in order within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value (that is, After reaching 4), it is configured to return to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in In addition, the value of the random number that becomes a high probability state after the jackpot is “1, 2, 3”, the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the jackpot is “0, 4”, and two types of hits are determined. The Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots of a high probability state and a low probability state, and one type of display mode corresponding to a deviation. Any one of the three display modes is selected.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than out of front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) after the occurrence of reach, and the final stop symbol is stopped before and after the reach symbol. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected as “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored.

  Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random number values from which the stop pattern is selected. This is based on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored (that is, the number of reservations), etc. This is to change the stop pattern selection ratio.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide random value range of 10 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected so that a jackpot is likely to occur and a reach effect is not selected more than necessary. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9, making it difficult to select “rear out of front / rear out of reach” or “reach out of front / rear out of reach”. Further, if each random number value is not stored in the holding ball storage area in a low probability state, a disturbance corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely off” in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. A table with a narrow numerical value range of 51 to 238 is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 9 to 50, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and therefore, the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. On the other hand, the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined by the first variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines a variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops after the reach occurs. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 11) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

  For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third variation type counter”. The 3rd symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs the decorative production according to the display mode of the 1st symbol display device 37. A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, the time required for the notice effect is added to the variable time, or on the contrary, the variable time is subtracted to shorten the variable display time, or an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the variable time is selected. . As with the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables with different ranges of random values from which the production pattern is selected, and whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. Depending on the low probability state or in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random value is stored, the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, and the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. Acquired when is detected. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 11).

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 18. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer allocation that is started periodically (in a 2 ms cycle in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 every 2 ms, for example. In this timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S701). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S703). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When reaching 738, 4, 238, 250), respectively, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a start winning process (see FIG. 17) accompanying the winning at the first entrance 64 is executed (S704), a firing control process is executed (S705), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with a touch sensor and turns on / off the launch of the ball on the condition that the launch stop switch for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining OFF. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the start winning process executed in the process of S704 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S704) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S801). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S801: Yes), whether or not the number N of actuated balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). Is determined (S802). If there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S802: Yes), the number of reserved balls N is incremented by 1 (S803), and further updated in step S703. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the free reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S804). On the other hand, if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S801: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the number N of active reserve balls is not less than 4 (S802: No). , S803 and S804 are skipped, the start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout and emission control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, referring to FIG. 10, a startup process when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance in the stack pointer is set, and the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. In order to wait, wait processing (1 s in this embodiment) is executed. Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S214 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the main process executed after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process of a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 and the frame opening / closing monitoring process of S216 are executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, the frame opening command transmission flag 203b is set to OFF, and the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is set to ON (S207). Thereby, the initial setting of the frame opening command transmission flag 203b and the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is completed (S207). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S201.

  In the process of S201, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S201). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S701 is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, by this external output process, a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, an effect time addition command, etc. necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2, and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the big win state (S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is obtained. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  After the process of S206, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S208). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S208: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 The power failure signal SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S209). If the predetermined time has already passed (S209: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S209: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are repeatedly updated (S210, S211).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S210). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S211). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  After the processing of S211, frame opening / closing monitoring processing is executed (S216). Details of the frame opening / closing monitoring process (S216) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are not closed, that is, when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, this frame open / close monitoring is performed. In the process, a process for temporarily stopping the game is executed.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S208, if power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S208: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) has been executed, the process at the time of power-off in S212 to S215 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S212), and a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). It transmits to (S213). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S214), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S215), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  The process of S208 is the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206, or the end of one cycle of the processes of S210, S211 and S216 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S207. That is, the process can be started from the process of S207 as in the case where the initialization process is initialized. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S207. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the variation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 11). In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of active suspension balls is greater than 0 (S303). If the number N of active balls is 0 (S303: No), this process is terminated as it is. If the number of the operation holding balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the operation holding ball number N is decremented by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the holding ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and the reserved first area → execution area, reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area. After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the change type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). Whether or not the stop symbol is set is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit, the symbol that becomes a high probability state after the big hit by the value of the first hit type counter C2 Or a symbol that is in a low probability state is determined. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when the high probability state is reached after the big hit, the green LED is turned on when the low probability state is reached, and the blue LED is turned on when it is off. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S309, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S310). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this stop command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and receives the stop command, whereby one variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 ends.

  Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) executed in the change process (see FIG. 12). In the variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, “373,727” is a winning value among the values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1 at the normal low probability, and “59,109,163, 211,263,317,367, "421,479,523,631,683,733" is the winning value.

  When it is determined that it is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode for the big hit is set (S402). ). In the process of S402, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, whether to shift to the high probability state or shift to the low probability state after the big hit is set. When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit by the process of S402. Of the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, when “0, 4”, the state shifts to the low probability state, and when “1, 2, 3”, the state shifts to the high probability state. .

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. The At this time, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and rough symbol fluctuations such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition to determining the variation time, the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. To do.

  The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation time, and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are respectively defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the fluctuation time can be set using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and can be set only with the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Whether or not to set with both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time.

  If it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, An effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to indicate whether the reach is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 varies depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state and the number of operation suspensions N. So the table is set up.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the detachment symbol. Is determined. At this time, as in the process of S403, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and the normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 , The number of variation symbols).

  When the process of S403 or the process of S405 is completed, the effect time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by the first and second type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S406). At this time, the addition / subtraction of effect time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display The variation time of the device 81 is set. In this embodiment, the addition / subtraction of the production time is determined according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3 when the variation display time is not changed and when the variation display time is added for one second, the variation display time is set to 2 seconds. In the case of addition, four types of addition values for the case of subtracting 1 second from the variable display time are determined.

  In addition, when the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect that increases the expected value of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect that causes the change time of the variable symbol to be longer than usual and is accompanied by a slip) An effect of displaying a notice character is produced, for example, an effect of making the change time of one change symbol shorter than usual and stopping it immediately). In addition, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that an added value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, so that the player expects a big hit by confirming the notice effect. Can do.

  Next, a variation pattern command is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S403 or S405 (S407), and a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S402 or S404. (S408). Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the added value of the effect time determined in the process of S406 (S409), and the process returns to the variation process.

  Next, the frame opening / closing monitoring process (S216) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the frame opening / closing monitoring process (S216) executed in the main process (see FIG. 11). In this frame open / close monitoring process (S216), first, it is determined whether or not the inner frame switch SW1 or the front frame switch SW2 is on (S501), and if the inner frame switch SW1 or the front frame switch SW2 is on ( (S501: Yes) Since at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the frame opening flag 203a is turned on (S502).

  After the process of S502, output of the frame open signal to the external output terminal board 261 is started (S503), and the process proceeds to S504. The open frame signal output to the external output terminal plate 261 by the processing of S503 is transmitted to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261. The hall computer 262 can detect that at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is open by receiving a frame open signal via the external output terminal board 261.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S501 that the inner frame switch SW1 or the front frame switch SW2 is on (S501: No), the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 are off. Since both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the frame release flag 203a is turned off (S507).

  After the process of S507, the frame open signal being output is stopped (S508), and the process proceeds to S504. When the frame open signal is stopped by the processing of S508, the hall computer 262 that has received the frame open signal via the external output terminal board 261 indicates that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 have been closed. Can be detected.

  In the process of S504, either a frame opening command indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, or a frame closing command indicating that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. In response to the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 or the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14, a frame command transmission process for transmitting the command to the sound lamp controller 113 is executed (S 504).

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, when the frame opening command is output in the process of S <b> 504, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the frame opening command and stores it in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The provided frame release flag 223a is turned on. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 can detect the opening of at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 by the frame opening command output from the main control device 110.

  When the frame closing command is output in the process of S504, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the frame closing command and turns off the frame opening flag 223a of the voice lamp control device 113. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 can detect the closing of both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 by the frame closing command output by the processing of S504.

  After the processing of S504, it is determined whether or not the frame opening flag 203a is on, that is, whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened (S505).

  If the frame release flag 203a is turned on by the process of S505 (S505: Yes), the process proceeds to the game stop process (S506). That is, when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, a game stop process (S506) is executed.

  In this game stop process (S506), a process for temporarily stopping the game state is executed and a frame open signal is output to the external output terminal board 261. After execution of the game stop process (S506), the process proceeds to S501, and the states of the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 are repeatedly monitored. In this game stop process (S506), it is also confirmed whether or not the power-off information is stored in the RAM 203 as in S208, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 203. If it is confirmed, the process proceeds to S212 (see FIG. 11).

  On the other hand, if the frame opening flag 203a is turned off by the process of S505 (S505: No), the frame closing monitoring process (S216) is terminated after executing the frame closing process (S509), and the main process Return to FIG. Therefore, when neither the inner frame 12 nor the front frame 14 is opened (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), a frame closing process (S509) is executed.

  When this frame closing process (S509) is executed when the gaming state is stopped by opening at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14, the gaming state stopped by the opening Execute the process to restore On the other hand, when it is executed when the gaming state is not stopped, that is, when it is executed when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are kept closed, the frame is not performed. The release monitoring process (S216) ends.

  Next, the frame command transmission process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a frame command transmission process executed in the frame open / close monitoring process (see FIG. 14). In this frame command transmission process, first, it is determined whether or not the frame release flag 203a is on, that is, whether or not at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened (S611).

  If it is determined that the frame opening flag 203a is on (S611: Yes), at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened, so that the frame opening command and the strobe signal SG3 are sent to the sound lamp control device. The process proceeds to S612 and subsequent processes, which are processes to be transmitted to 113. In the process of S612, it is determined whether or not the frame release command transmission flag 203b is off. If it is determined that the frame open command transmission flag 203b is off (S612: Yes), a frame open command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 after at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened. Since it has not been transmitted yet, transmission of a frame release command is started to transmit this (S613). Thereafter, processing is waited for 1 μs (S614), and transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is started (S615). When the strobe signal SG3 is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 starts receiving a frame opening command. It is output from the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 that, after starting transmission of the frame release command, waits for 1 μs in the process of S614 and then starts transmitting the strobe signal SG3. This is to stabilize the frame release command.

  After the process of S615, it is determined whether 1 μs has elapsed from the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (from the start of the process of S615) (S616). If 1 μs has elapsed from the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (S616: Yes), the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is terminated (S617). Through the processing of S614 to S617, the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is started 1 μs after the start of transmission of the frame release command, and the strobe signal SG3 that has started transmission is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 for 1 μs (strobe). The pulse width of the signal SG3 is 1 μs).

  On the other hand, if 1 μs has not elapsed since the start of the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (S616: No), the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is not ended (the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is continued), and this frame command transmission process is ended. To do. Whether or not 1 μs has elapsed since the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is determined by the time measured by a counter (provided in the MPU 201, not shown) that counts the elapsed time since the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3. Judgment based on. The same applies to each processing of S626 described later.

  When the process of S617 is executed, it is determined whether 1 ms has elapsed from the start of transmission of the frame release command (S618). If 1 ms has elapsed from the start of transmission of the frame release command (S618: Yes), transmission of the frame release command is terminated (S619). Through the processing of S613, S618, and S619, a frame opening command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 for 1 ms. On the other hand, if 1 ms has not elapsed since the start of transmission of the frame release command (S618: No), the transmission of the frame release command is not ended (while the frame release command continues to be transmitted), and this frame command transmission processing ends. To do. Whether or not 1 ms has elapsed since the start of transmission of the frame release command is determined by the time measured by a counter (provided in the MPU 201, not shown) that counts the elapsed time from the start of transmission of the frame release command. Judgment based on.

  When the process of S619 is executed, the frame open command transmission flag 203b is turned on because the transmission of the frame open command to the sound lamp control device 113 is completed (S620). Thereafter, the frame closing command transmission counter 203c is turned off (S621). The frame opening command has already been transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S613 to S619, but since the frame closing command has not been transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 yet, the frame closing command is transmitted in the processing of S621. The flag 203c is set off.

  If the frame open command transmission counter 203b is turned on in the process of S612 (S612: No), a frame open command indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been opened is sent to the sound lamp control device 113. Since it has already been transmitted once, the processing of S613 to S621 is skipped, and this frame command transmission processing is terminated.

  Here, 1 μs elapses from the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (determined as “Yes” in the process of S616) and until 1 ms elapses from the start of transmission of the frame release command (“Yes” in the process of S618). In other words, until the frame release command transmission flag 203b is turned on, “Yes” is continuously determined in the process of S612. At this time, the processing of S613 to S615 executed after it is determined as “Yes” in the processing of S612 is configured to be skipped after being executed once for the first time. That is, until the frame release command transmission flag 203b is turned on, it is determined as “Yes” in the process of S612. In this case, if the processes of S613 to S615 have already started, the processes of S613 to S615 are performed. The process is configured to skip and proceed to the process of S616. Therefore, the processes of S613 to S615 are not repeatedly executed more than once until the frame release command transmission flag 203b is turned on.

  Next, when it is determined in the processing of S611 that the frame release flag 203a is off (S611: No), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, so the frame closing command and the strobe are closed. The process proceeds to S622 and subsequent processes, which are processes for transmitting the signal SG3 to the sound lamp control device 113. In the process of S622, it is determined whether or not the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is off. If the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is off (S622: Yes), since both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the frame closing command has not been transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, In order to transmit, transmission of a frame closing command is started (S623). Thereafter, processing is waited for 1 μs (S624), and transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is started (S625). When this strobe signal SG3 is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 starts receiving a frame closing command. Note that after starting transmission of the frame closing command, the processing waits for 1 μs in the processing of S624, and then transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is started for the same reason as in the case of the frame opening command (command Stabilization).

  After the process of S625, it is determined whether 1 μs has elapsed from the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (from the start of the process of S625) (S626). If 1 μs has elapsed from the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (S626: Yes), the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is terminated (S627). By the processing of S624 to S627, the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is started 1 μs after the start of transmission of the frame closing command, and the strobe signal SG3 that has started transmission is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 for 1 μs (strobe). The pulse width of the signal SG3 is 1 μs).

  On the other hand, if 1 μs has not elapsed since the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (S626: No), the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is not completed (the transmission of the strobe signal SG3 is continued), and this frame command transmission process is terminated. To do.

  When the process of S627 is executed, it is determined whether 1 ms has elapsed since the transmission of the frame closing command was started (S628). If 1 ms has passed since the transmission start of the frame closing command (S628: Yes), the transmission of the frame closing command is terminated (S629). By the processing of S623, S628, and S629, the frame closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 for 1 ms. On the other hand, if 1 ms has not elapsed since the start of transmission of the frame closing command (S628: No), the transmission of the frame closing command is terminated without terminating transmission of the frame closing command (while continuing to transmit the frame closing command). To do. Whether or not 1 ms has elapsed since the start of transmission of the frame closing command is determined by the time measured by a counter (not shown) that counts the elapsed time since the transmission of the frame closing command is started. Judgment based on.

  When the process of S629 is executed, the transmission of the frame closing command to the sound lamp control device 113 is completed, so the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is turned on (S630). Thereafter, the frame release command transmission flag 203b is turned off (S631). The frame closing command has already been transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S623 to S629, but since the frame opening command has not yet been transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the frame opening command is transmitted in the processing of S631. The flag 203b is set to OFF.

  If the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is ON in the process of S622 (S622: No), the frame closing command indicating that the opened inner frame 12 or the opened front frame 14 is closed is controlled by the sound lamp control. Since it has already been transmitted once to the device 113, the processing of S623 to S631 is skipped, and this frame command transmission processing is terminated.

  Here, 1 μs elapses from the start of transmission of the strobe signal SG3 (determined as “Yes” in the process of S626) and 1 ms elapses from the start of transmission of the frame closing command (“Yes” in the process of S628). In other words, until the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is turned on, “Yes” is continuously determined in the process of S622. At this time, the processing of S623 to S625, which is executed after it is determined as “Yes” in the processing of S622, is skipped after being executed once for the first time, similarly to the processing of S613 to S615 described above. Processing is configured. Therefore, the processes of S623 to S625 are not repeatedly executed more than once until the frame closing command transmission flag 203c is turned on.

  As described above, in the frame command transmission process (S504), when at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened and the frame opening command indicating the opening has not been transmitted yet, the main control device 110 The inner frame opening command is transmitted only once to the sound lamp control device 113 for 1 ms. When 1 μs has elapsed from the start of transmission of the inner frame release command, main controller 110 transmits strobe signal SG3 to audio lamp controller 113 only once for 1 μs.

  Similar to the frame opening command, the frame closing command is transmitted only once from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 only when the command has not yet been transmitted. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the number of command transmissions of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and the processing load in the main process can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 27, processing performed by the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and this start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1116 (see FIG. 20) is performed by an instant voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 20, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see the external interrupt processing in FIG. 22), it executes the power-off processing in S <b> 1116. The power-off processing flag is turned on before execution of the power-off processing, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1116 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1002: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1116, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 223 of an abnormality.

  In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). Since the power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 20), the power-off flag is turned on by the process in S1115 as described later with reference to FIG. In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1116 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1116 is not completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then the interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1008 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S1004 to S1006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process of S1009 is that when the process from S1004 to S1006 is reached via the process of S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the main process executed after the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started (S1101). If it is not determined that 1 ms or more has passed (S1101: No), S1102 is determined. The process proceeds to S1111 without performing the process of S1110. Whether or not 1 ms has elapsed in the processing of S1101 is processing related to display (production) in S1102 to S1109, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the counter update process and the command determination process of S1112 in a short cycle. Thus, when a command transmitted from main controller 110 is received, control according to the received command can be executed immediately.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1101 that 1 ms or more has elapsed (S1101: Yes), the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1107 described later. Is set (S1102), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S1103). The power-on notification process is a notification for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. . Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1104 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1104, a waiting-for-customer effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1105). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on the hold lamp 85 in accordance with the operation hold ball N is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1106). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the feeling of expectation for the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production which can have, or selecting one reach production out of a plurality of reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1106 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1107), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  Thereafter, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the change pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the effect time of the lamp editing process in S1107 and the sound editing / output process in S1108 is set.

  In the process of S1110, it corresponds to the state of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 (whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open, or both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed). And the frame state corresponding | compatible process (S1110) which performs the alert | report by the light emission performed by each lighting part 29-33 and the display lamp 34 is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1111. Details of the frame state handling process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1111, the variable display process of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. In this variation display process, a plurality of counters (a counter for setting a stop symbol at the time of big hit, a counter for selecting a stop symbol at the time of disconnection, etc.) mounted on the sound lamp control device 113 are updated. Based on the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command transmitted from the control device 110, the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set, or the variation display pattern (rear / rear out, front / rear non-rear reach, complete out) Etc. are set. The stop symbol and the variation pattern are transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.

  In the processing of S1111, for example, when the command of the variation pattern transmitted from the main control device 110 is “completely out”, a complete out A pattern is selected from a plurality of patterns corresponding to complete out, and the third symbol display A command is transmitted to the display control device 110 so that the device 81 can produce a completely off A pattern. Therefore, since the detailed variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 with respect to one variation pattern determined by the main control device 110, the control of the main control device 110 is performed. The burden can be reduced. Furthermore, since the pattern of each effect determined in the main controller 110 can be reduced, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced and the cost can be reduced.

  In the process of S1112, a command determination process for determining a command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S1112). If it is determined by this command determination processing that the received command is a command to be used by the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and the received command is displayed. If it is determined that the command is used by the control device 114, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The command determination process (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the command determination process (S1112) is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1116). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the storage of information on occurrence of power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter the display on the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the command determination process (S1112) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1112) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) described above.

  In this command determination process (S1112), first, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the command reception memory 223g is a frame open command (S1201).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the external interrupt processing for receiving various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 and storing them in the command reception memory 223g will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. This external interrupt process is executed when the strobe signal SG3 output from the main controller 110 is received (when the strobe signal SG3 is 5 volts). When the external interrupt process is executed, since various commands are started to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the various commands are received and the received various commands are stored in the command reception memory 223g. (S1301). Thereafter, the external interrupt process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in step S1201 that the frame open command is stored in the command reception memory 223g (S1201: Yes), either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open. The release flag 223a is turned on (S1202). If it is determined in step S1201 that the frame release command is stored in the command reception memory 223g (S1201: Yes), the frame release command is deleted from the command reception memory 223g. Therefore, the process of S1201 is not repeatedly executed. The same applies to the processing of S1206 described later.

  After the processing of S1202, the frame opening notification count counter 223b is cleared to 0 (S1203), the frame opening notification time counter 223c is cleared to 0 (S1204), and a frame opening command is output to the display control device 114 (S1205). Transition to processing. Although details will be described later, when a frame opening command is output by the processing of S1205, the display control device 114 receives the frame opening command and sets a frame opening flag 233a provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. Turn on. That is, the display control device 114 can detect the opening of at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 by the frame opening command output from the sound lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S1201 that the frame open command is stored in the command reception memory 223g (S1201: No), the processing in steps S1202 to S1205 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1206. .

  In the process of S1206, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the command reception memory 223g is a frame closing command (S1206). If it is determined by the processing of S1206 that a frame closing command is stored in the command reception memory 223g (S1206: Yes), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. 223a is turned off (S1207), the frame closing notification counter 223e is cleared to 0 (S1208), the frame closing notification time counter 223f is cleared to 0 (S1209), and a frame closing command is output to the display control device 114 (S1210). , The process proceeds to S1211. Although details will be described later, when a frame closing command is output by the processing of S1210, the display control device 114 receives the frame closing command and turns off the frame opening flag 233a. That is, the display control device 114 can detect the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 by the frame closing command output from the sound lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined that the frame closing command is stored in the command reception memory 223g by the process of S1206 (S1206: No), the process of S1207 to S1210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1211. To do.

  In the processing of S1211, processing according to other received commands is performed (S1211). After the process of S1211, the command determination process (S1112) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  Next, the frame state handling process (S1110) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a frame state handling process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this frame state handling process (S1110), first, it is determined whether the frame release flag 223a is on, that is, whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened (S1401). Here, if the frame release flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened, so that the frame opening process described later with reference to FIG. 24 is executed. (S1402), the frame state handling process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S1401 that the frame opening flag 223a is off (S1401: No), whether the frame closing notification flag 223d is on, that is, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 Is closed, and it is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined period (30 s in this embodiment) since the closure (S1403).

  If it is determined by the processing of S1403 that the frame closing notification flag 223d is on (S1403: Yes), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and a predetermined period (in this embodiment) from the closing. , 30s), a frame closing process described later with reference to FIG. 26 is executed (S1404), and the frame state handling process is terminated.

  If it is determined by the processing in S1403 that the frame closing notification flag 223d is off (S1403: No), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and a predetermined period (this implementation) In the embodiment, since 30 s) has passed, the frame state handling process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the above-described frame opening process (S1402) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a frame opening time process (S1402) executed in the frame state handling process (see FIG. 23).

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the frame opening time process (S1402) executed when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, first, 1 is added to the frame opening notification time counter 223c (S1501). The value of the frame opening notification time counter 223c is 1000, that is, the processing of the frame opening notification processing (S1503) is executed, and the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is the maximum illuminance or It is determined whether 1 s has elapsed since switching to either one of the light extinctions (S1502). Here, since the frame state corresponding process (S1110) in which the frame open process (S1402) is provided is executed every 1 ms (see FIG. 20), if the value of the frame open notification time counter 223c is 1000, It shows that 1 s has passed.

  If the value of the frame opening alarm timing counter 223c has not yet reached 1000 by the processing of S1502 (S1502: No), the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is either the maximum illuminance or the extinction Since 1 s has not elapsed since switching to one of these, without changing the mode of light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, that is, without adding to the frame opening notification number counter 223b. Then, a frame opening notification process is performed to notify the outside by light emission that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened (S1503). The frame opening notification process (S1503) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the frame opening notification process (S1503) is executed, the frame opening process (S1402) is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S1502 that the value of the frame opening notification time counter 223c is 1000 (S1502: Yes), the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is the maximum illuminance. Or, since 1 s has passed since switching to either one of the lights off, the frame opening alarm timing counter 223c is cleared to 0 (S1504), and the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 In order to switch the notification mode, 1 is added to the frame opening notification count counter 223b (S1505). Then, the voice output device 226 is used to give a voice notification that “the frame is open” (S1506). Thereafter, the frame opening process (S1402) is terminated.

  As described above, in the frame opening process, if 1 s has elapsed since the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 has switched to either the maximum illuminance or the extinction, the frame opening notification By adding 1 to the number counter 223b, the mode of notification by light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is switched, and the voice output device 226 is used to notify the user that “the frame is open”. I do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the above-described frame release notification process (S1503) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a frame opening notification process (S1503) executed in the frame opening process (see FIG. 24).

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the frame opening notification process (S1503) for notifying the outside by light emission that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, first, the value of the frame opening notification number counter 223b is , 0 or an even number is determined (S1601). When it is determined that the value of the frame opening notification number counter 223b is 0 or an even number (S1601: Yes), the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on, that is, 5 to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227. While outputting the voltage of volt | bolt, the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on, that is, the voltage of 5 volt is output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1602). Thereby, the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 has the maximum illuminance (see FIG. 7).

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the value of the frame opening notification number counter 223b is 0 or an even number (S1601: No), that is, when the value of the frame opening notification number counter 223b is an odd number, the lamp display device 227 is displayed. The output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, the voltage of zero volt is output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227, and the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, the A voltage of zero volts is output (S1603). Thereby, the voltage applied to each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 becomes zero volts, and the lighting of each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is not performed and is turned off.

  As described above, when at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened, the frame opening notification counter 223b that switches on / off in 1 s until both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. Depending on the state, each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 repeats light emission and extinction at the maximum illuminance (repeats blinking).

  In order to execute the above-described frame closing process (S1404) for a predetermined period (30 s in the present embodiment) when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed after the process of S1602 or S1603, The frame closing notification flag 223d is turned on (S1604), and the frame opening notification processing (S1503) is ended.

  Next, the frame closing process (S1404) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing frame closing processing (S1404) executed in the frame state handling processing (see FIG. 23).

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the frame closing process (S1404) executed when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and within a predetermined period (30 s in this embodiment) from the closing, First, 1 is added to the frame closing notification timing counter 223f (S1701), and the value of the frame closing notification timing counter 223f is 1000, that is, the processing of the frame closing notification processing (S1703) is executed, and each lighting unit It is determined whether or not 1 s has elapsed since the light emission performed by 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is switched to any one of the maximum illuminance, the second illuminance, the third illuminance, and the extinction (S1702). Here, since the frame state corresponding process (S1110) in which the frame closing process (S1404) is provided is executed every 1 ms (see FIG. 20), if the value of the frame closing notification time counter 223f is 1000, It shows that 1 s has passed.

  If the value of the frame closing notification time counter 223f has not yet reached 1000 by the processing of S1702 (S1702: No), the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is the maximum illuminance and the second illuminance. Since 1 s has not elapsed since switching to either the third illuminance or the extinction, the lighting mode performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is not switched, that is, the number of frame closing notifications Without adding to the counter 223e, a frame closing notification process for notifying the outside by light emission that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been opened is executed (S1703). The frame closing notification process (S1703) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after execution of the frame closing notification process (S1703), the frame closing process (S1404) is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S1702 that the value of the frame closing notification time counter 223f is 1000 (S1702: Yes), the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is the maximum illuminance. Since 1 s has passed since switching to any one of the second illuminance, the third illuminance, and the extinction, the frame closing notification time counter 223f is cleared to 0 (S1704), and each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display In order to switch the mode of notification by light emission performed by the lamp 34, 1 is added to the frame closing notification frequency counter 223e (S1705), and this frame closing processing (S1404) is ended.

  As described above, in the process at the time of closing the frame, 1 s elapses after the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is switched to any one of the maximum illuminance, the second illuminance, the third illuminance, and the extinction. If it is, the frame closing notification frequency counter 223e is incremented by 1 to switch the notification mode by the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the frame closing notification process (S1703) described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the frame closing notification process (S1703) executed in the frame closing process (see FIG. 26).

  As shown in FIG. 27, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been previously opened for a predetermined period (30 s in this embodiment) from the closing. In the frame closing notification process (S1703) for notifying the outside by light emission, it is first determined whether or not the value of the frame closing notification counter 223e is 30 (S1801). As described above, the frame closing notification number counter 223e is incremented by 1 every 1 s when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, so that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 30. For example, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and 30s, which is a predetermined period, has elapsed since the closing.

  If it is not determined in step S1801 that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 30 (S1801: No), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and a predetermined period from the closing 30s. Therefore, the process proceeds to S1802 and subsequent processes in which notification is performed by light emission of each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34.

  In the processing of S1802, it is determined whether or not the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 0 or a multiple of 4 (S1802). When it is determined that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 0 or a multiple of 4 (S1802: Yes), the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on, that is, the lamp display device 227 A voltage of 5 volts is output to the IN1 terminal and the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on, that is, a voltage of 5 volts is output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1803). Thereby, the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 has the maximum illuminance (see FIG. 7).

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 0 or a multiple of 4 (S1802: No), the process proceeds to S1804, and whether the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is an odd number. It is determined whether or not (S1804). When it is determined that the value of the frame closing notification frequency counter 223e is an odd number (S1804: Yes), the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on, that is, the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on. While outputting the voltage of volts, the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, the voltage of zero volts is outputted to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1805). Thereby, the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 becomes the second illuminance (see FIG. 7).

  If it is not determined in step S1804 that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is an odd number (S1804: No), the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, the lamp display device. While outputting a voltage of zero volts to the IN1 terminal of 227, the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned on, that is, a voltage of 5 volts is output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1806). Thereby, the light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 becomes the third illuminance (see FIG. 7).

  As described above, if the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is not 30, that is, if both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and a predetermined period of 30 s has not elapsed since the closing, S1803, The process of S1805 or S1806 is repeatedly executed, and the mode of notification by light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is set to maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance every 1 s. → Change in order of maximum illumination.

  When it is determined in the processing of S1801 that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 30 (S1801: Yes), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and a predetermined period has elapsed since the closing. Since 30 s have passed, the process proceeds to S1807 and the subsequent processes, which are processes for terminating the notification by the light emission of each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34.

  In the process of S1807, the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, a voltage of zero volts is output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227, and the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off. That is, a voltage of zero volts is output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1807). Thereby, the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is turned off (see FIG. 7).

  Thereafter, the frame closing notification flag 223d, which is a flag for executing the frame closing process (see FIG. 26), is turned off (S1808), and the frame closing return process is executed (S1809). In the frame closing return process (S1809), when a game temporarily stopped by opening at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in the main controller 110 is returned, an audio lamp is set in response to the return. This is processing for returning control by the control device 113. After the frame closing return processing (S1809) is executed, the frame closing notification processing is terminated.

  As described above, in the frame closing notification process (S1703), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and if the predetermined period of 30 s has not elapsed since the closing, the process of S1803, S1805 or S1806 is repeated. The mode of notification by light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is executed every 1 s except for the extinguishing state. Maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → Change in order of maximum illumination. And if 30 s which is a predetermined period has passed since closing, the light emission performed by each electrical decoration parts 29-33 and the display lamp 34 will be light-extinguished.

  Here, referring to FIG. 28, as a result of the above-described frame opening process (see FIG. 24) and frame closing process (see FIG. 26), light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. The manner of notification by will be described in detail. FIG. 28A shows each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the frame opening process is executed. FIG. 28 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a mode of notification by light emission performed by the lamp 34. FIG. 28 (b) shows a state in which both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, and the predetermined state from the closing. It is the schematic diagram which showed the aspect of the alerting | reporting by light emission performed by each illumination part 29-33 and the display lamp 34 when the process at the time of a frame closure is performed during a period (for 30 s in this embodiment). In FIGS. 28A and 28B, the black circle “●” indicates the timing at which the notification mode by light emission is switched.

  When at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, a frame opening process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and first, as shown in FIG. And the red light emission performed by the display lamp 34 is a notification mode in which the maximum illuminance is achieved. Then, when 1 s has passed since the opening of at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, the red light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is turned off. Thereafter, the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is a notification mode in which the maximum illuminance and the turn-off are repeated every 1 s (a notification mode by red flashing). The red light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is repeatedly executed until both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. When both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the pachinko machine 10 ends the frame opening process (see FIG. 24) (ends the notification mode by flashing red) and closes the frame. The notification process (see FIG. 26) is executed.

  Next, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the frame closing process (see FIG. 26) is executed for a predetermined period of 30 s from the closing. In the frame closing process (see FIG. 26), as shown in FIG. 28 (b), first, a red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is a notification mode in which the maximum illuminance is achieved. Then, when 1 s has elapsed since both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 becomes a notification mode in which the second illuminance is obtained. Next, when 1 s elapses after the red light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 reaches the second illuminance, the red light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is the first. It becomes the mode of notification which becomes 3 illuminance. After that, when 1 s has elapsed since the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 has reached the third illuminance, the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is again performed. It becomes the mode of notification which becomes the 2nd illuminance. Furthermore, when 1 s has elapsed since the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 again becomes the second illuminance, the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is performed. This is a notification mode in which the maximum illuminance is reached again. That is, the mode of notification by red light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is set to maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum every 1 s except for the light-off state. Change in order of illuminance. The red light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is repeatedly executed until both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and a predetermined period of 30 seconds elapses from the closing. The

  As described above, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the pachinko machine 10 notifies each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 by light emission for a predetermined period of 30 seconds from the closing. Do. Therefore, even if at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, for example, cheating is performed, and then the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed within a short time, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed. It can be notified by light emission that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been previously opened for 30 s from the closing. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts performed on the pachinko machine 10. It should be noted that the above-mentioned fraudulent acts are each control device by opening the inner frame 12, in particular, unauthorized modification performed on the main control device 110, for example, attaching a so-called “hanging board”, or the main control device 110 itself. Illustrates illegal acts such as replacing the board with an illegal board, illegal acts on the game board 13 by opening the front frame 14, for example, illegal nail bending, and maintenance of a game ball in a highly profitable winning opening. Is done.

  In addition, as is apparent from FIG. 28B, the pachinko machine 10 emits light emitted from each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. The mode of notification according to is a mode of notification that is repeatedly changed in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance every 1 s except for the light-off state. In this way, by making the mode of notification by light emission to be a smooth change step by step, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to notice the change in the light emission mode, and the change in the light emission mode has been closed. It can be made hard to grasp that it is information which shows that frame 12 or front frame 14 was an open state before. On the other hand, a store clerk or the like who knows in advance that the change in the light emission mode is a notification indicating that the closed inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been opened before, for example, changes in the light emission mode. By this, it can be easily grasped that the closed inner frame 12 or front frame 14 was in the open state before.

  As is clear from FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), the pachinko machine 10 is configured to display each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. The notification mode by light emission performed by the lamp 34 is a notification mode in which the maximum illuminance and the extinction are repeated every 1 s (referred to as a flashing notification mode). On the other hand, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the notification mode by the light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is changed every 1 s except for the light-off state. It is set as the aspect of alerting | reporting changed repeatedly in order of maximum illumination intensity-> 2nd illumination intensity-> 3rd illumination intensity-> 2nd illumination intensity-> maximum illumination intensity. Therefore, the mode of notification by light emission when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the mode of notification by light emission when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed are clear. The light emission modes are different from each other. Therefore, it is possible to clearly distinguish and report whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in an open state or whether the closed inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been in an open state before.

  Next, processing performed by the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. For convenience of explanation, the external interrupt process of FIG. 31 will be described first, and then the main process of FIG. 29 will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114, and is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When this external interrupt process is executed, the received command is determined by the processes of S2201 and S2202.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the received command is a frame open command (S2201), and if it is determined that the received command is a frame open command (S2201: Yes), the inner frame 12 or Since it indicates that at least one of the front frames 14 has been opened, the frame open flag 233a is turned on (S2203), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  If it is determined by the process of S2201 that the received command is not a frame open command (S2201: No), it is determined whether the received command is a frame close command (S2202). Here, when it is determined that the received command is a frame closing command (S2202: Yes), it indicates that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, so the frame opening flag 233a is turned off. (S2204), the external interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S2202 that the received command is not a frame closing command (S2202: No), the process corresponding to the other received command is executed (S2205), and the external interrupt process is performed. finish. Note that as the processing executed in S2205, for example, if the received command is an effect permission command, an effect permission flag (not shown) in the work RAM 233 is turned on. If the received command is a variation pattern command, a variation start flag (not shown) in the work RAM 233 is turned on. Further, if the received command is a stop command, a process for stopping the fluctuation performed in the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114, and this main process is started when the power is turned on. First, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, processing for initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Thereafter, the compressed character information stored in a character information memory (not shown) in the character ROM 235 is read (S2002), the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is converted into the character information in the video RAM 234. Store in a storage area (not shown) (S2003). Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the character information storage area and written into a display storage area (not shown) in the video RAM 234 (S2004).

  Next, it is determined whether or not an effect permission flag (not shown) in the work RAM 233 is turned on in order to determine whether or not an effect permission command transmitted from the main control device 110 has been received (S2005). If the permission flag is not on (S2005: No), the processing after S2006 is waited until the effect permission flag is turned on.

  As a result of the process of S2005, if the production permission flag is turned on (S2005: Yes), it is determined whether or not a big hit is made (S2006). If not a big hit (S2006: No), the work RAM 233 It is determined whether or not a fluctuation start flag (not shown) is turned on (S2007). As a result, if the fluctuation start flag is turned on (S2007: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off to make it possible to determine that the fluctuation has already been started in the processing of S2007 after one cycle (S2008). Then, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern command is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S2009).

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2007, when the change start flag is off (S2007: No), or when the change starts in the process of S2009, a change effect process is performed (S2010). In the variation effect process, when the variable display is continuously performed, the character information and the effect pattern information are updated and set (new extraction of character information from the character information storage area in the video RAM 234, and the video RAM 234). When the variable display is not performed, the process proceeds to the frame release notification execution process (S2011) described later with reference to FIG. .

  After the processing of S2011, in order to execute the processing (S2006 to S2010, S2013) for performing the effect in the third symbol display device 81 every 20 ms, it is confirmed whether or not 20 ms or more have elapsed since the processing of S2006 was started. (S2012). As a result of checking in the processing of S2012, if 20 ms has not yet elapsed, the process waits until 20 ms or longer (S2012: No), and if 20 ms or longer has elapsed (S2012: Yes), the processing is performed in S2006. Transition to processing.

  If the result of the process in S2006 is a big hit (S2006: Yes), a big hit effect process is executed (S2013). In the jackpot effect process, the number of rounds is updated, the number of winning balls is updated, background images and the like that are different for each round are updated (new extraction of character information from the character information storage area in the video RAM 234, video The extracted character information is written into the display storage area in the RAM 234). After the big hit effect process (S2013) ends, the process shifts to a frame release notification execution process (S2011).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the frame opening notification execution process (S2011) described above will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a frame opening notification execution process (S2011) executed in the main process (see FIG. 29).

  As shown in FIG. 30, in this frame release notification execution process (S2011), it is first determined whether or not the frame release flag 233a is on (S2101). If the frame opening flag 233a is turned on by the processing of S2101, that is, if at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened (S2101: Yes), the 3rd symbol display device 81 indicates that “the frame is open. Is displayed "(S2102), and the process proceeds to S2101.

  On the other hand, when the frame opening flag 233a is turned off by the process of S2101, that is, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed (S2101: No), the frame closing process is executed (S2103), The frame opening notification execution process (S2011) ends. This frame closing process (S2103) is performed when the game in the main control device 110 that has been temporarily stopped by opening at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is restored. 114 is a process for returning the control at 114. If the game is not stopped, the frame closing process (S2103) is omitted.

  Therefore, according to this frame release notification execution process (S2011), when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the third symbol display device 81 is continuously in the open period. “Frame is open” is displayed (notified). Note that such notification using the third symbol display device 81 may be intermittent notification (display) similarly to the voice notification from the voice output device 226.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 is for a predetermined period of 30 seconds after the closing. The display lamp 34 notifies by light emission. Therefore, even if at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, for example, cheating is performed, and then the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed within a short time, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed. It can be notified by light emission that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been previously opened for 30 s from the closing. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, notification by blinking performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, that is, notification indicating opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is performed by the inner frame 12 or It is executed when any one of the front frames 14 is opened, but in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. The notification to change, that is, the notification indicating the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is not executed unless both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. Therefore, the notification indicating the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be executed only when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are reliably closed.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine of the second embodiment partially changes the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and performs a process at the time of frame closing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment ( 26) and a frame closing notification process (see FIG. 27) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is changed.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is obtained by adding a time counter 223h after closing the frame to the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Except for this addition, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment and the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are the same. Therefore, in the block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 32, the same parts as those in the block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Omitted and only different parts will be described.

  The time counter 223h after closing the frame is a counter that measures the elapsed time since the closing when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. The time counter 223h after closing the frame is a predetermined time (1 ms in this embodiment) that is an execution interval of the frame closing process (see FIG. 33) executed when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. ) Is incremented by 1 every time. Then, after the frame closing time counter 223h, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and 30s, which is a predetermined period, has elapsed, the execution of the frame closing process (see FIG. 33) is completed. Cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the frame closing process executed by the MPU 221 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a frame closing process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

  The frame closing process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 (MPU 221) of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 33 is performed by the sound lamp control device 113 (MPU 221) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The processing of S1706 to S1708 is added to the frame closing processing (see FIG. 26) to be executed. Except for this addition, the frame closing process (see FIG. 33) of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is the same as the frame closing process (see FIG. 26) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. . Therefore, in the frame closing process of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 33, the same parts as those in the frame closing process of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. The description thereof will be omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  In the frame closing process executed by the MPU 221 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, first, 1 is added to the time counter 223h after the frame is closed (S1706), and the time counter after the frame is closed. It is determined whether or not the value of 223h is 2000 or more, that is, whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed and 2s or more have passed since the closing (after the start of the frame closing process). (S1707). Here, since the frame state corresponding process (S1110) in which the frame closing process (S1404) is provided is executed every 1 ms (see FIG. 20), if the value of the time counter 223h after the frame is 2000 or more This indicates that 2 s or more have elapsed since the execution of the frame closing process.

  If the value of the time counter 223h after closing the frame has not yet reached 2000 by the processing of S1706 (S1707: No), the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227. A voltage of zero volt is output to the terminal and the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, a voltage of zero volt is output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1708). Thereby, the voltage applied to each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 becomes zero volts, and the red lighting of each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is not performed and is turned off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 223h after closing the frame is 2000 or more by the processing of S1706 (S1707: Yes), both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and from that closing (the processing at the time of closing the frame is executed). Since 2 s or more have passed since the start, frame closing notification processing for notifying one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been opened for the next 30 s, etc. ( S1701 to S1705) are executed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, even when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the frame closing notification process (S1703) is not immediately executed, but the closing is started. After 2 seconds elapses, the frame closing notification process (S1703) is executed. Thus, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine, the store clerk normally opens the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 in order to remove the malfunction, and then closes the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. (When both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), the notification by light emission may be temporarily interrupted for 2 seconds after both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. it can. When the notification by the light emission is temporarily interrupted, the store clerk who closed the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (the store clerk who closed both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14) It can be recognized that both the frame 12 and the front frame 14 are securely closed.

  In addition, as said malfunction, for example, the malfunction of the operation of a pachinko machine (for example, payout of a prize ball or the launch of a game medium) during a game, the malfunction of an accessory placed on the game board 13, or the game board For example, problems such as a clogged game ball flowing down 13 are exemplified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a frame closing notification process executed by the MPU 221 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a frame closing notification process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

  The frame closing notification process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 (MPU 221) of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 34 is performed by the sound lamp control device 113 (MPU 221) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The process of S1810 is added to the executed frame closing notification process (see FIG. 27). Except for this addition, the frame closing notification process (see FIG. 34) of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is the same as the frame closing notification process (see FIG. 27) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. . Therefore, in the frame closing notification process of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 34, the same number is attached to the same part as the frame closing notification process of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described in FIG. The description thereof will be omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  In the frame closing notification process executed by the MPU 221 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 30 ( S1801). When the execution of the frame closing notification process (S1703) is started, the frame closing notification frequency counter 223e is incremented by 1 every 1 s (see S1705 in FIG. 33), so that the value of the frame closing notification frequency counter 223e is 30. If there is, it indicates that 30 s, which is a predetermined period, has elapsed since the start of the frame closing notification process (S1703).

  If it is not determined in step S1801 that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 30 (S1801: No), the predetermined period of 30s has not elapsed since the start of the frame closing notification processing (S1703). Therefore, the process proceeds to S1802 and subsequent processes in which notification is performed by light emission of each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1801 that the value of the frame closing notification number counter 223e is 30 (S1801: Yes), 30 s, which is a predetermined period, has elapsed since the start of the frame closing notification processing (S1703). Therefore, the process proceeds to S1807 and subsequent processes, which are processes for ending the notification by the light emission of each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34.

  In the process of S1807, the output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off, that is, a voltage of zero volts is output to the IN1 terminal of the lamp display device 227, and the output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 is turned off. That is, a voltage of zero volts is output to the IN2 terminal of the lamp display device 227 (S1808). Thereby, the red light emission performed by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is turned off (see FIG. 7).

  Thereafter, the frame closing notification flag 223d, which is a flag for executing the frame closing process (see FIG. 33), is turned off (S1808), the value of the time counter 223h after the frame closing is cleared to 0 (S1810), and the frame is returned to the closed state. Processing is executed (S1809). After the frame closing return processing (S1809), the frame closing notification processing is terminated.

  As described above, the frame closing notification number counter 223e emits red light emitted by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 after 30s, which is a predetermined period, has elapsed since the start of the frame closing notification process (S1703). When it is turned off, 0 is cleared accordingly. Therefore, when the opened inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is closed next time (when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed), the elapsed time from the closing is correctly counted. be able to.

  The present invention has been described based on one embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the maximum illuminance in the notification indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, that is, the notification by blinking performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, and the inner frame 12 That indicates the closing of both the front frame 14 and the front frame 14 for a predetermined period, that is, changes in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. The maximum illuminance in the notification to be performed is the same illuminance (see FIGS. 28A and 28B), but is not limited thereto. That is, the maximum illuminance performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 → the second illuminance → the third illuminance → the second than the maximum illuminance in the flashing notification performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. The maximum illuminance in the notification that changes in the order of illuminance → maximum illuminance may be increased. In this case, it is possible to make the notification indicating the closing of both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 for a predetermined period more conspicuous than the notification indicating the opening of at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize and notify that the closed inner frame 12 or front frame 14 has been in an open state before.

  Contrary to the above, the maximum illuminance in the notification that changes in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, You may make the maximum illumination intensity in alerting | reporting by the blink performed by each electrical decoration parts 29-33 and the display lamp 34 high.

  In the pachinko machine in each embodiment, a notification indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, that is, a light emitting device that performs notification by blinking, and closing of both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are indicated for a predetermined period. The same light emitting device (each illumination unit 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) is used for notification, that is, notification that changes in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance. However, this is not a limitation. In other words, the light emitting device that performs notification by blinking is, for example, the illumination unit 30 and the illumination unit 32, while performing notification that changes in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance. The light emitting device may be, for example, the electric decoration unit 29, the electric decoration unit 31, the electric decoration unit 33, and the display lamp 34. In this case, different light-emitting devices are used for the light-emitting device that performs notification by blinking and the light-emitting device that performs notification that changes in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance. Therefore, the notification indicating the opening of at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 and the notification indicating the closing of both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 for a predetermined period are clearly different light emission modes. Therefore, it is possible to clearly distinguish and report whether at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in an open state or whether the closed inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been in an open state before.

  In the pachinko machine in each embodiment, as a notification indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, notification is performed by blinking performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. As a notification indicating the predetermined period, a notification was made to change in the order of maximum illuminance → second illuminance → third illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. It is not limited. That is, a notification indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in an open state and a notification indicating that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in a closed state are used for the same light emission. It is good also as an aspect. Specifically, both a notification indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in an open state and a notification indicating that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in a closed state are both provided. Both may be notified by flashing performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, or both of them are the maximum illuminance performed by the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 → second illuminance → third. The notification may be changed in the order of illuminance → second illuminance → maximum illuminance.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine in each embodiment, both the notification indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 and the notification indicating the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 for a predetermined period, Although the light emission is performed by the display lamp 34, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, instead of light emission by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, an electronic sound output from the audio output device 226 is used to notify that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the inner frame 12. In addition, notification indicating the closing of the front frame 14 for a predetermined period may be performed. In this configuration, a notification indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in an open state and a notification indicating that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in a closed state are provided for a predetermined period. Both of them may be notified by the same electronic sound, notification indicating that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in an open state, and both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. The notification indicating that it is a predetermined period may be notified by separate electronic sounds. In addition, notification indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is performed using an electronic sound output from the audio output device 226, and notification indicating the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 for a predetermined period is performed. You may perform using the decoration parts 29-33 and the display lamp 34. FIG. Contrary to this, the notification indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is performed by using each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, and the closing of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is indicated for a predetermined period. The notification may be performed using an electronic sound output from the audio output device 226.

  In the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the state (ON / OFF) of the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 is input to the main controller 110. However, the states of these switches SW1 and SW2 are Directly to a control device (sound lamp control device 113 or display control device 114) that controls a device that enables notification to the outside (for example, sound output device 226, lamp display device 227, third symbol display device 81, etc.). It is good also as a structure made to input.

  In addition, when inputting the state (ON / OFF) of the switches SW1 and SW2 to a device that enables notification to the outside, the external output terminal plate 261 is connected to the control device (for example, the switches SW1 and SW2). When the state is input to the sound lamp control device 113, it is configured to connect to the sound lamp control device 113), and a signal indicating that the frame is being opened is externally transmitted from this connection destination control device (such as the sound lamp control device 113). You may make it output to the output terminal board 261. FIG.

  Further, in the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the MPU 201 detects the state of the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2, and when one of the opening is detected, the MPU 201 controls the frame open signal to be externally transmitted. When output to the output terminal board 261 is configured, but the state of the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 is detected by hardware by a frame detection circuit configured by an electronic circuit, and either one of the openings is detected Further, the frame detection circuit may output a frame open signal to the external output terminal plate 261.

  In the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the inner frame switch SW1 and the front frame switch SW2 are turned off when the frame (the inner frame 12, the front frame 14) is closed, and the frame (the inner frame 12, the front frame 14). Although the switch having a structure that is turned on when the frame is opened is used, the switch is not limited to the switch having the structure as long as the opening / closing of the frame can be detected. For example, when the frame (inner frame 12, front frame 14) is closed and the frame (inner frame 12, front frame 14) is opened, such as a button-type switch that is turned on by pressing. A switch having a structure to be turned off may be used. Or you may utilize the sensor which can detect opening and closing of a frame, such as an optical sensor.

  Further, in the pachinko machine in each embodiment, when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, one frame opening command is output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the inner frame The frame closing command 1 is output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when both the front panel 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 is made aware that at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened, triggered by reception of the frame opening command and the frame closing command.

  In place of this, when at least one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, output of a frame opening command from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is started, and the inner frame 12 or The frame opening command is continuously output while at least one of the front frame 14 is opened, and the output of the frame opening command is stopped when the frame is closed. The sound lamp device 113 may be configured to recognize that at least one of the frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the frame opening command which is a common command is used when the inner frame 12 is opened and when the front frame 14 is opened, but this is not a limitation. The inner frame release command may be used when the inner frame 12 is opened, and the front frame opening command may be used when the front frame 14 is opened. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the manner of notification by blinking performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 depending on whether the inner frame opening command is received or the front frame opening command is received. You may comprise as follows. In this case, it is possible to distinguish and notify whether the inner frame 12 is opened or the front frame 14 is opened by blinking performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. .

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the frame closing command which is a common command is used when the opened inner frame 12 is closed and when the opened front frame 14 is closed. The inner frame closing command may be used when the inner frame 12 is closed, and the front frame closing command may be used when the front frame 14 is closed. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the illuminance of light emitted by each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 when the inner frame closing command is received and when the front frame closing command is received. You may comprise so that the aspect of may be changed. In this case, whether the inner frame 12 has been opened or the front frame 14 has been opened before closing due to a change in illuminance of light emission performed by each of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. , And can be notified separately.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine in each embodiment, the control device (sound lamp control device 113) on the side that receives a command (such as a frame open command or a frame close command) from the main control device 110 includes the lighting units 29 to 33 and Although it was set as the structure which performs the control which changes the mode of the alerting | reporting by light emission performed with the display lamp 34, the main controller 110 which detected the opening and closing of a frame (the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14) is each lighting part 29-33 and display. The configuration may be such that control for changing the mode of notification by light emission performed by the lamp 34 is performed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 emits light for 2 seconds after both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, for example, between 1 s and 3 s, the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamps 34 The light may be turned off without emitting light.

  In the pachinko machine in each embodiment, in the frame opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 14), when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open (that is, when the frame open flag 203a is on). ) Return from the game stop process (S506) to S501, and the processes of S501 to S508 are looped until it is detected that both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed. Instead, after the processing of S503 or S508, without performing the processing of S505, S506, or S509, when the frame open signal or the opened frame (inner frame 12 or front frame 14) is closed A configuration may be adopted in which processing for outputting an output return signal or the like to the external output terminal board 261 is performed, and the frame opening / closing monitoring processing is terminated (that is, the frame opening / closing monitoring processing is not looped).

  In the above-described embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display instruction to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114 so that a command instructing the output of each audio and the lighting of the lamp is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  The slot machine has an outer shape formed by a substantially box-shaped housing (main body) in which a rotating drum and the like are installed inside, and a front door (door body) that opens and closes the front surface of the housing. Inside the slot machine, a main control device that performs main control of the game is installed, and medals to be given to the player are stored. Therefore, in the slot machine, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 illustrated in the above embodiment, when the opened front door is closed, the light emitting device provided in the slot machine for a predetermined period of 30 seconds from the closing. If the front door is opened, for example, an illegal act is performed, and then the opened front door is closed within a short period of time. It can be notified by light emission that the front door has been opened before for 30 seconds from its closing. As a result, for example, it is possible to easily find fraudulent acts performed on the slot machine. Note that fraudulent acts performed on the slot machine (illegal acts due to unauthorized opening of the front door) include, for example, replacement of a control device (main control device, payout control device, etc.) and a medal that becomes a player's game value Illustrate fraudulent acts such as theft of

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above are shown.

  A main body, a door body for opening and closing the front surface of the main body, a door opening detection means for detecting the opening when the door body is opened with respect to the main body, and the door opening detection means opening the door body In a gaming machine provided with a notification unit that performs notification when a notification is detected, a first notification mode setting unit that sets a first notification mode indicating a mode of notification performed by the notification unit, and the door opening detection unit First opening means for causing the notifying means to perform notification in the first notifying mode set by the first notifying mode setting means during the opening period of the door body when the opening of the door is detected by And a second notification mode setting unit that sets a second notification mode indicating a mode of notification performed by the notification unit, and when the door opening detection unit detects the closing of the door body in which the opening is detected. After closing the door Gaming machine 1, characterized in that a second executing means for executing a predetermined period, the notification of the second notification manner set by the second notification manner setting means to the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, when the door is opened and the opening is detected by the door opening detection means, the first execution means is set by the first notification mode setting means during the opening period of the door body. The notification in the first notification mode is executed by the notification means. Then, when the opened door body is closed and the closure is detected by the door opening detection means, the second execution means is set by the second notification mode setting means during a predetermined period after the door body is closed. The notification means performs the notification in the second notification mode. Thus, even when the opened door is closed, the second execution unit causes the notification unit to perform notification during the predetermined period. Therefore, even if the door is opened, for example, an illegal act is performed on the gaming machine, and then the opened door is closed within a short time, the closed door is previously opened. It can be notified during a predetermined period that there has been. Therefore, for example, it is possible to facilitate the discovery of fraudulent acts performed on gaming machines. The notification mode by the notification unit in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit and the notification mode by the notification unit in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit The same configuration or different configurations may be used.

  In the gaming machine 1, the notification mode by the notification unit in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit and the notification in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit. A gaming machine 2 having a different configuration from the mode of notification by means.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the notification mode by the notification unit in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit and the notification unit in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit. Since the configuration differs from the notification mode, the notification performed by the notification means when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body and the door opening detection means when the door opening detection is detected. This is different from the notification performed by the notification means. Therefore, whether the door body is in an open state or whether the closed door body was in an open state before can be clearly distinguished and notified.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the second execution means is timed by a second time measuring means for measuring an elapsed time since the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, and the second time measuring means. Execution prohibiting means for prohibiting the notification to be executed by the notification means until the elapsed time exceeds a predetermined period, and when the elapsed time measured by the second timing means has passed a predetermined period, 3. A gaming machine 3 comprising: prohibition canceling means for canceling prohibition by the execution prohibiting means.

  According to the gaming machine 3, the elapsed time measured by the second timing means, that is, the elapsed time after the door closing detection is detected by the door opening detection means, until a predetermined period elapses. The execution prohibiting unit prohibits the notification to be executed by the notification unit. Thereafter, when the elapsed time since the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body passes a predetermined period, the prohibition release means releases the prohibition by the execution prohibition means. Thus, even if the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body, the notification is prohibited until the elapsed time since the detection has passed a predetermined period. Therefore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in a gaming machine and the door body is normally opened to remove the malfunction, and then the opened door body is closed, the door body Since the prohibition of notification is temporarily performed during a predetermined period after the closing of the door, the person who closed the opened door body (for example, a store clerk) recognizes that the door body has been securely closed. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the notification means includes light emission notification means for performing notification by light emission when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, and the second notification mode setting means. The first time measuring means for measuring the elapsed time after the door opening detection is detected by the door opening detection means, and the light emission by the light emission notifying means according to the elapsed time measured by the first time measuring means. The gaming machine 4 further comprises illuminance setting means for setting a light emission mode in which the illuminance changes as the second notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine 4, the illuminance setting means sets the light emission mode in which the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification means changes according to the elapsed time counted by the first time measuring means as the second notification mode. Therefore, when the opened door body is closed and the closure is detected by the door opening detection means, the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification means is changed according to the elapsed time during a predetermined period, so that the light emission mode Can be changed smoothly. In this way, since the illuminance of the light emission changes smoothly according to the elapsed time, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to notice the change in the light emission mode, and the change in the light emission mode is caused by the closed door body. It can be made hard to grasp that it is information which shows that it was an open state before. On the other hand, for example, a game shop clerk who knows in advance that the change in the light emission mode is a notification indicating that the closed door body was previously open, It can be easily grasped that the closed door body was in the open state before.

  In the gaming machine 4, the first notification mode setting unit includes a blinking setting unit that sets a light emission mode in which light emitted by the light emission notification unit blinks as the first notification mode, and the illuminance setting unit includes the first illuminance setting unit, Limiting illuminance setting for setting, as the second notification mode, a light emission mode in which the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification unit, which changes according to the elapsed time measured by the one clocking unit, exceeds the predetermined illuminance A gaming machine 5 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the blink setting unit sets the light emission mode in which the light emission by the light emission notification unit blinks as the first notification mode. Thus, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the light emission by the light emission notification means is repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the limited illuminance setting means emits light from the light emission notifying means according to the elapsed time measured by the first time measuring means, that is, according to the elapsed time after the door opening detection is detected by the door opening detecting means. The light emission mode in which the illuminance changes at a level exceeding the predetermined illuminance is set as the second notification mode. Thereby, when the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body, the light emission by the light emission notification means does not turn off during a predetermined period, and changes with an illuminance exceeding a predetermined illuminance. Thus, the light emitted by the light emission notification means is repeatedly turned on and off when the door opening detection means detects the door opening, while the door opening detection means detects the door closing. In this case, the light intensity does not turn off and changes with illuminance exceeding a predetermined illuminance. Therefore, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the light emission notification means performs the light emission notification means, and when the door opening detection means detects the door body closure, the light emission notification means performs the light emission. The notification by means of a light emission mode that is clearly different. Therefore, it is possible to clearly distinguish and notify whether the door body is in an open state or whether the closed door body has been in an open state before.

  In the gaming machine 4 or 5, the first notification mode setting unit sets at least a maximum illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification unit in the first notification mode as the first notification mode, and the second notification mode. The setting unit sets at least the maximum illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification unit in the second notification mode as the second notification mode, and the light emission set by the second notification mode setting unit as the second notification mode. The maximum illuminance of light emission by the notification means is set to be higher than the maximum illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification means set as the first notification mode by the first notification mode setting means. 6.

  According to the gaming machine 6, the maximum illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification unit set by the second notification mode setting unit as the second notification mode is the light emission by the light emission notification unit set by the first notification mode setting unit as the first notification mode. The illuminance is set higher than the maximum illuminance. Thereby, when the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body, the light emission notification means, rather than the maximum illuminance of light emission performed by the light emission notification means when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body. The maximum illuminance of the emitted light is higher. Therefore, the light emission performed by the light emission notification means is more conspicuous when the door opening detection means detects the closing of the opened door body than when the door opening detection means detects the door opening. be able to. Therefore, it can be emphasized and notified that the closed door body was an open state before.

  In any of the gaming machines 4 to 6, the door body includes an inner frame that is opened and closed with respect to the main body, and a transparent plate support door that is opened and closed with respect to the inner frame, and the light emitting device. The notification means is arranged at a plurality of locations on the front surface of the transparent plate support door, and is configured to be able to execute the notification by the light emission independently at each of the plurality of locations, the first execution means and The second execution means combines the light emission notification means disposed at the plurality of locations, and causes the combined light emission notification means to execute the notification by the light emission, and the first execution means causes the light emission by the light emission. The combination of the light emission notification means for executing the notification and the combination of the light emission notification means for executing the notification by the light emission by the second execution means have different configurations. Tricks machine 7.

  According to the gaming machine 7, the light emission notification means is disposed at a plurality of locations on the front surface of the transparent plate support door that is opened and closed with respect to the inner frame, and light emission is independently performed at each of the disposed plurality of locations. The notification is configured to be executable. And a 1st execution means and a 2nd execution means combine the light emission alerting | reporting means arrange | positioned in several places, respectively, and perform alerting | reporting by light emission by the combined light emission alerting | reporting means, respectively. Here, the combination of the light emission notification unit that causes the first execution unit to execute the notification by the light emission and the combination of the light emission notification unit that causes the second execution unit to execute the notification by the light emission have different configurations. Therefore, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the light emission notification means performs the light emission notification means, and when the door opening detection means detects the door body closure, the light emission notification means performs the light emission. The notification by means of a light emission mode that is clearly different. Therefore, it is possible to clearly distinguish and notify whether the door body is in an open state or whether the closed door body has been in an open state before.

  In any one of the gaming machines 4 to 7, the door body includes an inner frame that is opened and closed with respect to the main body, and a transparent plate support door that is opened and closed with respect to the inner frame. The opening detection means is provided on each of the inner frame and the transparent plate support door, and the first execution means detects the opening of at least one of the inner frame or the transparent plate support door by the door opening detection means. In the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit, the light emission notification unit causes the light emission notification unit to execute the second emission unit. When the closing of both the inner frame and the transparent plate support door is detected, the light emission notification unit is caused to execute the notification by the light emission in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit. Characterized by Tricks machine 8.

  According to the gaming machine 8, the first execution means sets the first notification set by the first notification mode setting means when the opening of at least one of the inner frame or the transparent plate support door is detected by the door opening detection means. In an aspect, the light emission notification means is caused to execute notification by light emission. On the other hand, the second execution unit is a second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit when the closing of both the inner frame and the transparent plate support door is detected by the door opening detection unit. To perform notification by light emission. Therefore, the notification by the light emission in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit is sent to the light emission notification unit even when either the inner frame or the transparent plate support door is opened. On the other hand, the notification by the light emission in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting means is performed when the inner frame and the transparent plate support door are both securely closed. This can be executed by the notification means.

  Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 8, further comprising a control means disposed on the back side of the door body for controlling the game.

According to the gaming machine 9, since the control means (control device) for controlling the game is arranged on the back side of the door body, that is, on the back side of the door body, the control means (control) by unauthorized opening of the door body. Unauthorized acts on the device can be reliably prevented.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is generally configured to be provided with a door body that can be opened and closed on the front side of a gaming machine body, and the front surface of the gaming machine body can be opened (for example, Patent Document 1 : JP 2007-111100 A). Here, it is also possible that the door body is composed of an inner frame attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be opened and closed, and a glass door (front frame) attached to the inner frame so as to be opened and closed. It is common.
In a pachinko machine that is a type of gaming machine, a game board is mounted from the back side of the inner frame, and the game area of the game board can be exposed by opening the glass door. Therefore, if a malfunction occurs in the game area during the game (for example, a malfunction of an accessory placed in the game area or a ball clogging of a game ball flowing down in the game area), the hall attendant makes a glass The door is opened to solve the problem.
On the other hand, a control device for controlling the game is attached to the back side of the game board. When the inner frame is closed with respect to the gaming machine main body, the control device is connected to the gaming machine main body and the inner frame. And the like (for example, the back side of the inner frame). If a malfunction occurs in the operation of the gaming machine during the game (for example, a prize ball is not paid out or a game ball is not fired), an inner frame is opened by a hall attendant, and a control device check (for example, Wiring and electrical contact checks) are performed.
By the way, in a pachinko machine which is a kind of gaming machine, lottery is performed at a predetermined timing, and when a predetermined result (for example, a big hit) is obtained by the lottery, a large amount of game media (game balls and coins) are paid out. It becomes possible. Since the lottery is controlled by a control device (for example, a main control device), the control device is illegally altered by an unauthorized person for the purpose of generating an unreasonable jackpot and illegally paying out a large amount of game media. There are many cases that occur. In addition, as a specific example of unauthorized modification, an unauthorized substrate (for example, “hanging substrate”) is attached to the control device, the control device itself is replaced with an unauthorized substrate, or the CPU of the control device is illegally used. For example, the CPU may be replaced. Therefore, the inner frame may be opened illegally for the purpose of fraudulent acts by the fraudster.
In addition, the fraudulent person may bend the ball guide nail installed in the game area illegally to make it advantageous for winning the game ball to the winning opening that triggers the lottery (so-called nail bending goto), An illegal act such as directly putting a game ball by hand into a highly profitable winning opening (for example, a specific winning opening) may be performed. Therefore, the glass door may also be opened illegally.
Since the inner frame and the glass door can often be opened improperly as described above, when the opening of the inner frame or the glass door is detected, the inner frame and the glass door are turned on by lamp lighting or sound output during the opening period. A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies the outside that a frame or a glass door has been opened and prevents unauthorized opening.
<Issues>
However, when the inner frame or the glass door is opened, in the gaming machine that notifies only during the opening period, when the fraudulent act by the fraudulent person is completed within a relatively short time, Since the notification time is also relatively short, there is a problem that it is difficult to detect fraud.
The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of facilitating the discovery of fraud.
<Means>
To achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 detects a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and when the door body is opened with respect to the main body. A door opening detecting means and a notifying means for notifying when the door opening detection is detected by the door opening detecting means, a first notification showing a mode of notification performed by the notifying means. When the opening of the door body is detected by the first notification mode setting means for setting the mode and the door opening detection means, the first notification mode setting means is set by the first notification mode setting means during the opening period of the door body. A first execution unit that causes the notification unit to perform notification in one notification mode; a second notification mode setting unit that sets a second notification mode indicating a mode of notification performed by the notification unit; and the release is detected. The door is closed when the door is open Second execution means for causing the notification means to execute notification in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting means during a predetermined period after the door is closed when detected by the exit means; It has.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the notification means by the notification means in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting means, and the second notification The second notification mode set by the mode setting unit is different from the notification mode by the notification unit.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the second execution unit calculates an elapsed time after the door opening detection unit detects the closing of the door body. Second timing means for timing, execution prohibiting means for prohibiting notification to be executed by the notification means until an elapsed time measured by the second timing means has passed a predetermined period, and the second timing means And a prohibition canceling means for canceling the prohibition by the execution prohibiting means when an elapsed time counted by a time elapses a predetermined period.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the notification unit is configured to emit light when the door opening detection unit detects the opening of the door body. A light emitting notification means for performing notification, wherein the second notification mode setting means includes a first time measuring means for measuring an elapsed time after the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body; Illuminance setting means for setting, as the second notification mode, a light emission mode in which the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification unit changes according to the elapsed time counted by the unit.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, wherein the first notification mode setting unit sets a light emission mode in which the light emission by the light emission notification unit blinks as the first notification mode. The illuminance setting means changes the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification means that changes according to the elapsed time measured by the first time measuring means with an illuminance exceeding a predetermined illuminance. Limiting illuminance setting means for setting a light emission mode as the second notification mode is provided.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the door body is opened and the opening is detected by the door opening detection means, the first execution means sets the first notification mode during the door opening period. The notification means is caused to execute notification in the first notification mode set by the means. Then, when the opened door body is closed and the closure is detected by the door opening detection means, the second execution means is set by the second notification mode setting means during a predetermined period after the door body is closed. The notification means performs the notification in the second notification mode. Thus, even when the opened door is closed, the second execution unit causes the notification unit to perform notification during the predetermined period. Therefore, even if the door is opened, for example, an illegal act is performed on the gaming machine, and then the opened door is closed within a short time, the closed door is previously opened. It can be notified during a predetermined period that there has been. Therefore, for example, there is an effect that it is possible to easily find an illegal act performed on a gaming machine. The notification mode by the notification unit in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit and the notification mode by the notification unit in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit The same configuration or different configurations may be used.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the notification mode by the notification unit in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit and the notification mode by the notification unit in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit Since the configuration is different, the notification is performed by the notification unit when the door opening detection unit detects the opening of the door body, and the notification unit is performed when the door opening detection unit detects the closing of the door body. The notification is a different notification mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly distinguish and notify whether the door body is in the open state or whether the closed door body has been in the open state before.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the elapsed time measured by the second clocking means, that is, the door body by the door opening detection means. The execution prohibiting unit prohibits the notification to be executed by the notification unit until the elapsed time from the detection of the closing of the vehicle passes a predetermined period. Thereafter, when the elapsed time since the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body passes a predetermined period, the prohibition release means releases the prohibition by the execution prohibition means. Thus, even if the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body, the notification is prohibited until the elapsed time since the detection has passed a predetermined period. Therefore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in a gaming machine and the door body is normally opened to remove the malfunction, and then the opened door body is closed, the door body Since the prohibition of notification is temporarily performed during a predetermined period after the closing of the door, the person who closed the opened door body (for example, a store clerk) recognizes that the door body has been securely closed. There is an effect that can be done.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect exerted by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the illuminance setting means is adapted to the elapsed time counted by the first timing means. The light emission mode in which the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification unit changes is set as the second notification mode. Therefore, when the opened door body is closed and the closure is detected by the door opening detection means, the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification means is changed according to the elapsed time during a predetermined period, so that the light emission mode Can be changed smoothly. In this way, since the illuminance of the light emission changes smoothly according to the elapsed time, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to notice the change in the light emission mode, and the change in the light emission mode is caused by the closed door body. It can be made hard to grasp that it is information which shows that it was an open state before. On the other hand, for example, a game shop clerk who knows in advance that the change in the light emission mode is a notification indicating that the closed door body was previously open, There is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp that the closed door body was previously opened.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the blink setting unit sets the light emission mode in which the light emission by the light emission notification unit blinks as the first notification mode. To do. Thus, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the light emission by the light emission notification means is repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the limited illuminance setting means emits light from the light emission notifying means according to the elapsed time measured by the first time measuring means, that is, according to the elapsed time after the door opening detection is detected by the door opening detecting means. The light emission mode in which the illuminance changes at a level exceeding the predetermined illuminance is set as the second notification mode. Thereby, when the door opening detection means detects the closing of the door body, the light emission by the light emission notification means does not turn off during a predetermined period, and changes with an illuminance exceeding a predetermined illuminance. Thus, the light emitted by the light emission notification means is repeatedly turned on and off when the door opening detection means detects the door opening, while the door opening detection means detects the door closing. In this case, the light intensity does not turn off and changes with an illuminance exceeding a predetermined illuminance. Therefore, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the light emission notification means performs the light emission notification means, and when the door opening detection means detects the door body closure, the light emission notification means performs the light emission. The notification by means of a light emission mode that is clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly distinguish and notify whether the door body is in the open state or whether the closed door body has been in the open state before.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 Outer frame (main body)
12 Inner frame (part of door)
14 Front frame (part of door)
29-33 electric decoration part (part of notifying means)
34 indicator lamps (part of notifying means)
221 MPU (part of first execution means, part of second execution means)
223b Frame opening notification number counter (part of the first notification mode setting means)
223c Frame opening notification time counter (part of the first notification mode setting means)
223e frame closure notice frequency counter (part of the second notification mode setting means)
223f frame closure broadcast time counter (part of the second notification mode setting means)
223h Time counter after frame closing ( measuring means)
S1402 Processing when opening frame (part of first execution means)
S1404 Frame closing process (part of second execution means)
S1503 Frame opening notification process (part of the first notification mode setting means)
S1602 frame opening notification processing S1603 frame open notification processing S1703 frame closing notification process (part of the second notification mode setting means)
S1707: Yes frame closing process (prohibition canceling means)
S1707: No frame closing process (execution prohibition means)
S1803 frame closure notification processing S1805 frame closing notification processing S1806 frame closing notification within the processing SW1 frame switch (part of the door opening and closing detection means)
SW2 front frame switch (part of the door opening and closing detection means)

Claims (5)

A main body, a door body for opening and closing the front surface of the main body, a door opening detection means for detecting the opening when the door body is opened with respect to the main body, and the door opening detection means opening the door body In a gaming machine provided with an informing means for informing when is detected,
First notification mode setting means for setting a first notification mode indicating a mode of notification performed by the notification unit;
When opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detection means, during the opening period of the door body, notification in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting means is executed to the notification means. First execution means for causing,
A second notification mode setting unit that sets a second notification mode indicating a mode of notification performed by the notification unit;
In a second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit during a predetermined period after the door is closed when the door opening detected by the door detection is detected by the door opening detection unit. And a second execution unit that causes the notification unit to execute the notification.   The notification mode by the notification unit in the first notification mode set by the first notification mode setting unit, and the notification mode by the notification unit in the second notification mode set by the second notification mode setting unit The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine has a different configuration. The second execution means includes
A second time measuring means for measuring an elapsed time after the door closing detection is detected by the door opening detecting means;
Execution prohibiting means for prohibiting notification to be executed by the notification means until an elapsed time measured by the second timing means passes a predetermined period;
3. The apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising: a prohibition canceling unit that cancels the prohibition by the execution prohibiting unit when an elapsed time measured by the second clocking unit elapses a predetermined period. Game machines. The notification means includes a light emission notification means for performing notification by light emission when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body,
The second notification mode setting means includes:
First time measuring means for measuring an elapsed time after the door closing detection is detected by the door opening detecting means;
And illuminance setting means for setting, as the second notification mode, a light emission mode in which the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification unit changes according to the elapsed time measured by the first clocking unit. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3. The first notification mode setting unit includes a flashing setting unit that sets, as the first notification mode, a light emission mode in which light emission by the light emission notification unit blinks.
The illuminance setting means is configured to change a light emission mode in which the illuminance of light emission by the light emission notification means that changes according to the elapsed time measured by the first time measuring means changes with an illuminance exceeding a predetermined illuminance. 5. A gaming machine according to claim 4, further comprising restricted illuminance setting means for setting as a notification mode.

Images